Page 1 This CD provides a guide to setting up and using your scanner. It is a snapshot of our live web site at http://info.uniden.com/twiki/bin/view/UnidenMan4. Note that we are continuously updating and improving the content on this web site to include information not available at the time of production, as well as to enhance the instructions as we hear from you.
Page 2 UnidenScannersUsersGuides < UnidenMan4 < TWiki available on certain scanner models. Model-specific options are indicated in the text. Conventional Systems EDACS SCAT Systems EDACS Trunked Systems LTR Trunked Systems Motorola Trunked Systems Digital scanners only Standard P25 Trunked Systems Single Frequency P25 Trunked Systems General scanning information Please note that these pages are meant as general instructions.
Page 3 If you have difficulty viewing this guide in your current browser, please try downloading one of the browsers listed. Except as otherwise noted, this page applies to the following scanners: BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...DImage_090515/Manual/UnidenScannersUsersGuides.html (3 of 3)5/26/2009 11:11:28 AM...
Page 4 General Precautions Quick Start Using Preloaded Systems Feature List Specifications Hardware specifications "BCD996XT -- The Complete Reference" is coming soon. FCC Information Warranty and Support Information User Guide Information Operation overview Available operation modes Menu reference file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCD996XT.html (1 of 2)5/26/2009 11:11:43 AM...
Page 5 Using Number Tags Using Quick Keys, Startup Keys, and Search Keys Using Tone Out mode Using Close Call mode Using Band Scope mode Using GPS mode This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCD996XT.html (2 of 2)5/26/2009 11:11:43 AM...
Page 6 BCT15X < UnidenMan4 < TWiki BCT15X Important information General Precautions Quick Start Feature List Specifications FCC Information Warranty and Support Information User Guide Information Operation overview Setting up the hardware Programming your scanner Operating your scanner Important information For general information about using a scanner, including how to program the various types of radio systems into your scanner, we suggest you start with the General Users Guide page.
Page 7 BCT15X < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Operation overview Available operation modes Menu reference Keys and their functions Reading the display Setting up the hardware Included with the scanner Connecting the antenna Connecting a GPS receiver Programming your scanner Setting up systems Programming Number Tags Programming Quick Keys Programming Search Keys...
Page 8 BCD396XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki BCD396XT Important information General Precautions Quick Start Specifications FCC Information Warranty and Support Information User Guide Information Operation overview Setting up the hardware Programming your scanner Operating your scanner Important information For general information about using a scanner, we suggest you start with the...
Page 9 BCD396XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki specifications Software reference Information Warranty and Support Information User Guide Information Operation overview Available operation modes Menu reference Keys and their functions Reading the display Setting up the hardware Included with the scanner Installing the batteries Connecting the antenna Attaching the belt clip Connecting a GPS receiver...
Page 10 BCD396XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Setting up systems Programming Number Tags Programming Quick Keys Programming Search Keys Programming locations Setting alerts Operating your scanner Using Number Tags Using Quick Keys, Startup Keys, and Search Keys Using Tone Out mode Using Close Call mode Using Band Scope mode Using GPS mode This page applies to the following scanner(s):...
Page 11 BC346XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki BC346XT Important information file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BC346XT.html (1 of 4)5/26/2009 11:11:48 AM...
Page 12 BC346XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki General Precautions Quick Start Specifications FCC Information Warranty and Support Information User Guide Information Operation overview Setting up the hardware Programming your scanner Operating your scanner Important information For general information about using a scanner, we suggest you start with the General Users Guide page.
Page 13 BC346XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki FCC Information Warranty and Support Information User Guide Information Operation overview Available operation modes Menu reference Keys and their functions Reading the display Setting up the hardware Included with the scanner Installing the batteries Connecting the antenna Attaching the belt clip Connecting a GPS receiver Programming your scanner...
Page 14 BC346XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Using Tone Out mode Using Close Call mode Using Band Scope mode Using GPS mode This page applies to the following product(s): BC346XTUser Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BC346XT.html (4 of 4)5/26/2009 11:11:48 AM...
Page 15 ConventionalSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Conventional Systems Please note that these pages are meant as general instructions. While most of the information here applies to all scanners, some options may not be available on certain scanner models. Model-specific options are indicated in the text.
Page 16 Recommended Edit Name Name Set Number Tag Number tag Set Quick Key Quick key Optional BCD996XT and BCT15X: Set Record Record Flag BCD396XT and BC346XT: Not available BCD396XT and BCD996XT: Set Audio AGC Automatic Gain Control (AGC) BC346XT and BCT15X: Not available...
Page 17 Property Option name Required Edit Frequency Frequency Recommended BCD396XT and BCD996XT: Set Audio Type Analog/digital BC346XT and BCT15X: Not available CTCSS/DCS Set CTCSS/DCS (BCD396XT: analog channels only) file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Do.../temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/ConventionalSystems.html (3 of 4)5/26/2009 11:11:49 AM...
Page 18 Set Lockout Lockout Set Priority Priority Volume Offset Volume Offset Available operations Copy Channel Copy a channel Delete Channel Delete a channel This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT UsersGuide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Do.../temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/ConventionalSystems.html (4 of 4)5/26/2009 11:11:49 AM...
Page 19: Edacs Scat Systems
EDACSSCATSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki EDACS SCAT Systems Please note that these pages are meant as general instructions. While most of the information here applies to all scanners, some options may not be available on certain scanner models. Model-specific options are indicated in the text. This section deals with EDACS SCAT systems.
Page 20 EDACSSCATSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Edit Name Name Number tag Set Number Tag Optional BCD996XT or BCT15X: Set Record Record BCD396XT or BC346XT: Not available BCD396XT or BCD996XT: Set Audio AGC Automatic Gain Control (AGC) BC346XT or BCT15: Not available...
Page 21 Set Record Record BCD396XT or BC346XT: Not available. Volume Offset Volume Offset Set Lockout Lockout Available operations Delete a Delete Frequency frequency This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20...s/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/EDACSSCATSystems.html (3 of 3)5/26/2009 11:11:50 AM...
Page 22: Edacs Trunked Systems
EDACSTrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki EDACS Trunked Systems Please note that these pages are meant as general instructions. While most of the information here applies to all scanners, some options may not be available on certain scanner models. Model-specific options are indicated in the text. This section deals with EDACS Wide or standard systems.
Page 23 Option name Required None Recommended Edit Name Name Set Number Tag Number tag Optional BCD396XT and BCD996XT: Set Audio AGC Automatic Gain Control (AGC) BC346XT and BCT15X: Not available BCD996XT and BCT15X: Set Record Record BCD396XT and BC346XT: Not available...
Page 24 EDACSTrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Emergency Alert Emergency alert Set ID Format (AFS) or (DEC) ID format ID Scan/Search ID scan/search Priority ID scan Priority ID scan Available operations Copy System Copy a system Delete System Delete a system Rvw ID:Srch L/O Review locked-out IDs Clr All L/O IDs Clear all locked-out IDs...
Page 25 EDACSTrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Optional Set Attenuator Attenuator Set Hold Time Hold time Location Set Location Info information BCT15X: Set State State Other Models: Not available Set Lockout Lockout Set Modulation Modulation Set Startup Key Startup key Available operations Delete Site Delete a site Create at least 1 frequency in each site...
Page 26 EDACSTrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Logical channel Input LCN number Recommended None Optional Set Lockout Lockout Available operations Delete Delete a frequency Frequency Programming a system for Scanning Once you create the system and at least 1 site, you can Search the system with no problems.
Page 27 EDACSTrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Recommended Edit Name Name Set Quick Key Quick key Optional Set Location Location information Info Set Lockout Lockout Available operations Delete Group Delete a group Create at least 1 channel in each group Each trunked system can contain up to 500 channels. 1.
Page 28 Set Lockout Lockout Set Priority Priority Volume Offset Volume Offset Available operations Copy Channel Copy a channel Delete a Delete Channel channel This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT UsersGuide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20...emp/CDImage_090515/Manual/EDACSTrunkedSystems.html (7 of 7)5/26/2009 11:11:51 AM...
Page 29: Ltr Trunked Systems
LTRTrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki LTR Trunked Systems Please note that these pages are meant as general instructions. While most of the information here applies to all scanners, some options may not be available on certain scanner models. Model-specific options are indicated in the text. Below is an example of a Logic Trunked Radio or LTR system from RadioReference: LTR System Here is a...
Page 30 Option name Required None Recommended Edit Name Name Set Number Tag Number tag Optional BCD396XT and BCD996XT: Set Audio Automatic Gain Control (AGC) BC346XT and BCT15X: Not available BCD996XT and BCT15X: Set Record Record Out BCD396XT and BC346XT: Not available...
Page 31 LTRTrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Set Delay Time Delay time ID Scan/Search ID scan/search Priority ID scan Priority ID scan Available operations Copy System Copy a system Delete System Delete a system Rvw ID:Srch L/O Review locked-out IDs Clr All L/O IDs Clear all locked-out IDs Create at least 1 site Each LTR system can contain up to 256 sites, and all systems must contain at least 1 site.
Page 32 LTRTrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Set Attenuator Attenuator Set Hold Time Hold time Location Set Location Info information BCT15X: Set State State Other Models: Not available Set Lockout Lockout Set Modulation Modulation Set Startup Key Startup key Available operations Delete Site Delete a site Create at least 1 frequency in each site Each LTR system can contain up to 20 frequencies in each site, and all sites must contain at least 1...
Page 33 LTRTrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Recommended None Optional Set Lockout Lockout Available operations Delete Delete a frequency Frequency Programming a system for Scanning Once you create the system and at least 1 site, you can Search the system with no problems. However, if you want to Scan the system, you'll need to program the required elements in following order...
Page 34: Create A Channel In Each Group
LTRTrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Set Quick Key Quick key Optional Set Location Location information Info Set Lockout Lockout Available operations Delete Group Delete a group Create a channel in each group Each trunked system can contain up to 500 channels. 1.
Page 35 Set Lockout Lockout Set Priority Priority Volume Offset Volume Offset Available operations Copy Channel Copy a channel Delete a Delete Channel channel This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...s/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/LTRTrunkedSystems.html (7 of 7)5/26/2009 11:11:52 AM...
Page 36: Motorola Trunked Systems
MotorolaTrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Motorola Trunked Systems Please note that these pages are meant as general instructions. While most of the information here applies to all scanners, some options may not be available on certain scanner models. Model-specific options are indicated in the text. A Motorola system can be an 800 MHz, 400 MHz (UHF), or 100-200 MHz (VHF) system.
Page 37 MotorolaTrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Even though some (or all) of the System Voice channels are APCO 25, this system, and others like it, is correctly programmed as a Motorola 800 MHz system, per the information given for the System Type. Motorola UHF System (400 MHz band) file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...p/CDImage_090515/Manual/MotorolaTrunkedSystems.html (2 of 8)5/26/2009 11:11:53 AM...
Page 38 MotorolaTrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Motorola VHF System (100-200 MHz band) Here is a conceptual layout diagram of a basic Motorola system. (Click here for a legend of the diagram.) You can download a planning worksheet for Motorola systems as a pdf file or an Excel...
Page 39 Fleet map systems only) Recommended Edit Name Name Set Number Tag Number tag Optional BCD396XT and BCD996XT: Set Audio AGC Automatic Gain Control (AGC) BC346XT and BCT15X: Not available BCD996XT and BCT15X: Set Record Record BCD396XT and BC346XT: Not available...
Page 40 Set Hold Time Hold time Location Set LocationInfo information Set Lockout Lockout Set Modulation Modulation BCD396XT and BCD996XT: P25 Waiting Time P25 wait time BC346XT and BCT15X: Not available Set Startup Key Startup key Available operations Delete Site Delete a site Create at least 1 frequency in each site Each site must contain at least 1 frequency.
Page 41 MotorolaTrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 1. On the Edit Site menu, select the site you just created. 2. Go to the Set Frequencies sub-menu and select New Frequency . 3. Enter at least 1 frequency for this site. 4. If you need to change any of the frequency properties, you can do that now. Unless a property is Required , you can operate the system without changing the default settings.
Page 42 (All of these options can be found by selecting the channel name under the Edit Channel menu. If necessary, the sub-menu and the exact option name are listed beside each property.) TGID (Edit Talk Group Required Audio type (Analog or digital) (BCD396XT and BCD996XT only) (Set Audio Type) Recommended Name (Edit...
Page 43 Record; BCD396XT and BC346XT: Not available) Optional Lockout (Set Lockout) Priority (Set Priority) Volume Offset Copy Channel Available operations Delete Channel This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...p/CDImage_090515/Manual/MotorolaTrunkedSystems.html (8 of 8)5/26/2009 11:11:53 AM...
Page 44: Standard P25 Trunked Systems
StandardP25TrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Standard P25 Trunked Systems To determine whether the information on this page applies to your scanner, see the tags at the bottom of the page. This section deals with standard Project 25 or P25 systems. Click here for information on P25 one- frequency systems.
Page 45 None Recommended Edit Name Name Set Number Tag Number tag Optional Set Audio AGC Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Set Record (BCD996XT Only) Record Set Delay Time Delay time Set ID Format (DEC/HEX) ID format file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...DImage_090515/Manual/StandardP25TrunkedSystems.html (2 of 7)5/26/2009 11:11:54 AM...
Page 46 StandardP25TrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki ID Scan/Search ID scan/search Priority ID scan Priority ID scan Available operations Copy System Copy a system Delete System Delete a system Rvw ID:Srch L/O Review locked-out IDs Clr All L/O IDs Clear all locked-out IDs Create at least 1 site All systems must contain at least 1 site.
Page 47 StandardP25TrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Set Attenuator Attenuator Set Hold Time Hold time Set LocationInfo Location information Set Lockout Lockout Set Startup Key Startup key Available operations Delete Site Delete a site Create at least 1 frequency in each site All sites must contain at least 1 frequency.
Page 48 StandardP25TrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Delete Frequency Delete a frequency Programming a system for Scanning Once you create the system and at least 1 site, you can Search the system with no problems. However, if you want to Scan the system, you'll need to program the required elements in following order (click here for information on using the menu):...
Page 49: Create A Channel In A Group
Required Edit Talk Group ID TGID Recommended Edit Name Name Set Number Tag Number tag Optional Set Alert Alert BCD996XT only:Set Record Record Set Priority Priority Volume Offset Volume Offset Available operations Copy Channel Copy a channel Delete Channel Delete a channel...
Page 50 StandardP25TrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki The information on this page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCD396XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...DImage_090515/Manual/StandardP25TrunkedSystems.html (7 of 7)5/26/2009 11:11:54 AM...
Page 51 SingleFrequencyP25TrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Single-Frequency P25 Trunked Systems Single-frequency P25 systems are almost idfentical to standard P25 systems, except they only have one site per system and the system can use a P25 network address. Here is a conceptual layout diagram of a single-frequency P25 system (click here for a legend of...
Page 52 Name) Network address (P25 NAC Option) Recommended Number tag (Set Number Tag) Automatic gain control (AGC) (Set Audio AGC) Record (BCD996XT only Record) Delay time (Set Delay Time) Optional ID format (Set ID Format (DEC/HEX) ID scan/search Scan/Search) Copy system...
Page 53 SingleFrequencyP25TrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki settings. Site properties (All of these options can be found by selecting the site name under the Edit Site menu. If necessary, the sub-menu and the exact option name are listed beside each property.) Frequencies (Set Frequencies) Required...
Page 54 SingleFrequencyP25TrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 2. Go to the Edit Group menu and select New Group . 3. If you need to change any of the channel group properties, you can do that now. Unless a property is Required , you can operate the system without changing the default settings.
Page 55 (Edit Talk Group Required Name (Edit Name) Recommended Number tag (Set Number Tag) Alert (Set Alert) Record (BCD996XT only Record) Optional Lockout (Set Lockout) Volume Offset Copy Channel Available operations Delete Channel This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCD396XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Do..._090515/Manual/SingleFrequencyP25TrunkedSystems.html (5 of 5)5/26/2009 11:11:55 AM...
Page 56: Radio Systems Overview
RadioSystemsOverview < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Radio Systems Overview There are two basic types of radio systems: conventional systems and trunked systems. Conventional radio systems Trunked radio systems Trunked system basics How a trunked system works A real life example Conventional radio systems In a conventional radio system, each group of users is assigned one (for simplex systems) or two frequencies (for repeater systems).
Page 57 RadioSystemsOverview < UnidenMan4 < TWiki How a trunked system works A typical communication on a trunked system goes something like this: 1. A user selects the channel they want to communicate on and presses the PTT button on the side of their radio. 2.
Page 58 RadioSystemsOverview < UnidenMan4 < TWiki operations teams such as SWAT, Narcotics, and Traffic each have one or more dedicated channels for their use as well. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...emp/CDImage_090515/Manual/RadioSystemsOverview.html (3 of 3)5/26/2009 11:12:00 AM...
Page 59: Deciphering Trunked Systems
DecipheringTrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Deciphering Trunked Systems Before you program a trunked system System Type P25 Systems LTR Systems Motorola Systems EDACS Systems Conventional Systems Non-scannable Systems System Voice System Frequencies Talk Group IDs (Channels) Before you program a trunked system To the average radio user, the complexity of a trunked system is invisible.
Page 60: System Type
DecipheringTrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki System Type There are five major types of scannable systems; some of these also have subtypes. In the RadioReference database, you can generally determine the radio system type by looking at the line labeled System Type at the top of the screen (inside the red square in the screenshot). file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...DImage_090515/Manual/DecipheringTrunkedSystems.html (2 of 5)5/26/2009 11:12:03 AM...
Page 61 DecipheringTrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki P25 Systems These are identified in the RadioReference database as Project 25 Standard . If the System Type line says anything else, then it is not a P25 system (even though it might have some P25 channels).
Page 62: System Voice
DecipheringTrunkedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki develop a scanner that can monitor them. These non-scannable systems are identified in the system type as: EDACS w/ESK LTR Passport OpenSky Standard MPT1327 Tetra System Voice The other line inside the red square in the screenshot is System Voice , which summarizes the kinds of voice modulation used on the system.
Page 63 RadioReference is the ability to tag channels directly on the site and print out a nicely-formatted hardcopy of each system. It makes this task much, much easier.) This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...DImage_090515/Manual/DecipheringTrunkedSystems.html (5 of 5)5/26/2009 11:12:03 AM...
Page 64 LocationBasedScanning < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Location-based Scanning Location-based scanning allows you to control which systems/sites and channel groups are scanned based on your exact location. This frees you from having to manually enable and disable systems or channel groups as you change location. To use Location-Based scanning, you need to have the following: the location for the center point for each system/site or channel group you want to control the radius or distance from the center point you want to set as the range for each system/site or...
Page 65 LocationBasedScanning < UnidenMan4 < TWiki targets that have a well- defined jurisdiction and their transmission are only relevant when you are within that jurisdiction. To use the geopolitical approach, find the geographical center of the scanning target's territory (whether city, county, district, precinct, or other agency jurisdiction), and set these coordinates as your center point location.
Page 66 LocationBasedScanning < UnidenMan4 < TWiki On the other hand, if you sub-divide the area, you may end up with areas that are not covered: file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...mp/CDImage_090515/Manual/LocationBasedScanning.html (3 of 7)5/26/2009 11:12:06 AM...
Page 67 LocationBasedScanning < UnidenMan4 < TWiki The Antenna-Centric Approach Using an antenna-centric approach, you set the physical antenna location as the system/sites center point and the antenna's actual reach as the range. file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...mp/CDImage_090515/Manual/LocationBasedScanning.html (4 of 7)5/26/2009 11:12:06 AM...
Page 68 LocationBasedScanning < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Finding an antenna location You can find the physical location of antennas using the databases available at Radio Referenceor the FCC's Antenna Structure Registration site. Both sites list the latitude, longitude, and height of the antenna, and both sites can map the exact location for you.
Page 69 LocationBasedScanning < UnidenMan4 < TWiki find what you're looking for.) Combining for Efficiency Because many trunked systems have both multiple antenna sites and multiple agencies with differing geographic boundaries, you may want to combine the approaches: 1. Use the antenna centric approach at the site level: set the geographic coordinates of the antenna as the central location for each site.
Page 70 See Also Connecting a GPS receiver Programming locations This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...mp/CDImage_090515/Manual/LocationBasedScanning.html (7 of 7)5/26/2009 11:12:06 AM...
Page 71: Scanning Legally
ScanningLegally < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Scanning Legally Your scanner covers frequencies used by many different groups, including police and fire departments, ambulance services, government agencies, private companies, amateur radio services, military operations, pager services, and wireline (telephone and telegraph) service providers. It is legal to listen to almost every transmission your scanner can receive.
Page 72 ScanningLegally < UnidenMan4 < TWiki This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Do...ents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/ScanningLegally.html (2 of 2)5/26/2009 11:12:07 AM...
Page 73 This might be particularly true of the type of earphone that is placed in the ear canal. Liquid Exposure Warning Uniden does not represent this unit to be waterproof. To reduce the risk of fire or electrical shock, do not expose this unit to rain or moisture! Power Disconnection Caution Important: Always turn the scanner off before disconnecting external power.
Page 74: The Fcc Wants You To Know
Scanning Legally. Modification Notice Changes or modifications to this product not expressly approved by Uniden, or operation of this product in any way other than as detailed by this User's Guide, could void your authority to operate this product. Part 15 Information This scanner has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a scanning receiver, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Page 75 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...ents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/FCCInformation.html (2 of 2)5/26/2009 11:12:07 AM...
Page 76: Support Information
WARRANTOR: UNIDEN AMERICA CORPORATION (Uniden) ELEMENTS OF WARRANTY: Uniden warrants, for one year, to the original retail owner, this Uniden Product to be free from defects in materials and craftsmanship with only the limitations or exclusions set out below. WARRANTY DURATION: This warranty to the original user shall terminate and be of no further effect 12 months after the date of original retail sale.
Page 77 Uniden, (C) improperly installed, (D) serviced or repaired by someone other than an authorized Uniden service center for a defect or malfunction covered by this warranty, (E) used in any conjunction with equipment or parts or as part of any...
Page 78 WarrantyAndSupportInformation < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Carter Boulevard Fort Worth, TX 76155 This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BCD346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Do...age_090515/Manual/WarrantyAndSupportInformation.html (3 of 3)5/26/2009 11:12:08 AM...
Page 79 Uniden America is marked as such and used with permission. Content or information in external sources are neither the intellectual property not the responsibility of Uniden America Corp. Uniden America makes no claim to the accuracy or completeness of external content.
Page 80 CategoryBCD996XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Subscribe this topic Results from UnidenMan4 web retrieved at 19:38 (GMT) AvailableOperationModes PaulOpitz r15 - 12 May 2009 - 15:33 BCD996XT PaulOpitz r13 - 11 May 2009 - 20:45 BCD996XTBandScopeMode PaulOpitz r6 - 12 May 2009 - 17:15 BCD996XTCloseCallMode...
Page 81 CategoryBCD996XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki BCD996XTMenuTree PaulOpitz r5 - 13 Apr 2009 - 18:59 BCD996XTScanMode PaulOpitz r9 - 12 May 2009 - 18:16 BCD996XTSettings PaulOpitz r7 - 12 May 2009 - 18:20 BCD996XTSpecs PaulOpitz r12 - 12 May 2009 - 18:26 BCD996XTToneOutMode PaulOpitz r4 -...
Page 82 CategoryBCD996XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki r5 - 12 May 2009 - 20:00 EDACSSCATSystems PaulOpitz r7 - 13 May 2009 - 14:40 EDACSTrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r7 - 12 May 2009 - 20:14 EditBandPlan PaulOpitz r5 - 30 Mar 2009 - 17:16 EditChannel PaulOpitz r6 - 15 Apr 2009 - 15:17...
Page 83 CategoryBCD996XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki PaulOpitz r7 - 24 Mar 2009 - 19:32 IntroductionToSAMEMessages PaulOpitz r8 - 12 May 2009 - 20:53 LTRTrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r8 - 12 May 2009 - 21:11 LocationBasedScanning PaulOpitz r4 - 24 Mar 2009 - 19:41 MobileConnectingAGPSReceiver PaulOpitz r4 -...
Page 84 CategoryBCD996XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki PriorityScan PaulOpitz r5 - 06 Apr 2009 - 22:25 ProgramLocation PaulOpitz r5 - 14 Apr 2009 - 15:22 ProgramSystem PaulOpitz r7 - 12 May 2009 - 15:23 ProgrammingLocations PaulOpitz r4 - 24 Mar 2009 - 20:43 PublishContribHistory PaulOpitz r30 -...
Page 85 CategoryBCD996XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki r4 - 24 Mar 2009 - 20:54 SearchFor PaulOpitz r7 - 12 May 2009 - 21:46 SearchKeys PaulOpitz r5 - 14 Apr 2009 - 15:44 SearchWithScan PaulOpitz r6 - 14 Apr 2009 - 15:53 SetAlertTone PaulOpitz r4 - 24 Mar 2009 - 21:00...
Page 86 CategoryBCD996XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki PaulOpitz r10 - 13 May 2009 - 14:51 StartupKeys PaulOpitz r4 - 24 Mar 2009 - 21:50 ToneAAndToneBSettings PaulOpitz r4 - 24 Mar 2009 - 22:09 ToneOutFor PaulOpitz r7 - 14 Apr 2009 - 18:14 UnidenScannersUsersGuides PaulOpitz r16 -...
Page 87 CategoryBCT15X < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Subscribe this topic Results from UnidenMan4 web retrieved at 19:38 (GMT) AnalogEditChannel PaulOpitz r6 - 12 May 2009 - 15:11 AnalogWXOperation PaulOpitz r5 - 12 May 2009 - 15:31 AvailableOperationModes PaulOpitz r15 - 12 May 2009 - 15:33 BCT15X PaulOpitz r9 -...
Page 88 CategoryBCT15X < UnidenMan4 < TWiki BCT15XKeySafeMode PaulOpitz r3 - 12 May 2009 - 19:23 BCT15XKeysAndTheirFunctions PaulOpitz r2 - 24 Apr 2009 - 19:12 BCT15XMenuTree DavidMcCormick r3 - 05 May 2009 - 15:17 BCT15XReadingTheDisplay PaulOpitz r5 - 12 May 2009 - 21:38 BCT15XScanMode PaulOpitz r7 -...
Page 89 CategoryBCT15X < UnidenMan4 < TWiki r6 - 08 May 2009 - 14:36 CategoryBCT15X PaulOpitz NEW - 26 Mar 2009 - 18:39 CloseCall PaulOpitz r9 - 12 May 2009 - 19:42 ConventionalSystems PaulOpitz r9 - 12 May 2009 - 19:58 DecipheringTrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r5 - 12 May 2009 - 20:00...
Page 90 CategoryBCT15X < UnidenMan4 < TWiki PaulOpitz r7 - 12 May 2009 - 19:56 EditTalkGroupID PaulOpitz r10 - 12 May 2009 - 15:18 FCCInformation PaulOpitz r7 - 24 Mar 2009 - 19:30 GeneralPrecautions PaulOpitz r7 - 24 Mar 2009 - 19:32 IntroductionToSAMEMessages PaulOpitz r8 -...
Page 91 CategoryBCT15X < UnidenMan4 < TWiki MotorolaFleetMaps PaulOpitz r4 - 24 Mar 2009 - 19:45 MotorolaTrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r13 - 12 May 2009 - 21:29 NumberTags PaulOpitz r6 - 14 Apr 2009 - 15:17 PriorityScan PaulOpitz r5 - 06 Apr 2009 - 22:25 ProgramLocation PaulOpitz r5 -...
Page 92 CategoryBCT15X < UnidenMan4 < TWiki r7 - 24 Mar 2009 - 20:54 SearchAndStore PaulOpitz r4 - 24 Mar 2009 - 20:54 SearchFor PaulOpitz r7 - 12 May 2009 - 21:46 SearchKeys PaulOpitz r5 - 14 Apr 2009 - 15:44 SearchWithScan PaulOpitz r6 - 14 Apr 2009 - 15:53...
Page 93 CategoryBCT15X < UnidenMan4 < TWiki PaulOpitz r9 - 13 May 2009 - 14:51 StartupKeys PaulOpitz r4 - 24 Mar 2009 - 21:50 StatebyStateScanning PaulOpitz r2 - 08 May 2009 - 18:39 ToneAAndToneBSettings PaulOpitz r4 - 24 Mar 2009 - 22:09 UnidenScannersUsersGuides PaulOpitz r16 -...
Page 94 CategoryBCD396XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Results from UnidenMan4 web retrieved at 19:38 (GMT) AvailableOperationModes PaulOpitz r15 - 12 May 2009 - 15:33 BCD396XT PaulOpitz r13 - 11 May 2009 - 20:11 BCD396XTSpecs PaulOpitz r12 - 13 May 2009 - 14:35 BandScopeMode PaulOpitz r7 -...
Page 95 CategoryBCD396XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki ConventionalSystems PaulOpitz r9 - 12 May 2009 - 19:58 DecipheringTrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r5 - 12 May 2009 - 20:00 EDACSSCATSystems PaulOpitz r7 - 13 May 2009 - 14:40 EDACSTrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r7 - 12 May 2009 - 20:14 EditBandPlan PaulOpitz r5 -...
Page 96 CategoryBCD396XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki r10 - 12 May 2009 - 15:18 FCCInformation PaulOpitz r7 - 24 Mar 2009 - 19:30 GPSMode PaulOpitz r7 - 12 May 2009 - 20:39 GeneralPrecautions PaulOpitz r7 - 24 Mar 2009 - 19:32 HoldMode PaulOpitz r6 - 12 May 2009 - 21:07...
Page 97 CategoryBCD396XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki PaulOpitz r6 - 24 Mar 2009 - 19:45 MotorolaFleetMaps PaulOpitz r4 - 24 Mar 2009 - 19:45 MotorolaTrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r13 - 12 May 2009 - 21:29 NumberTags PaulOpitz r6 - 14 Apr 2009 - 15:17 PriorityScan PaulOpitz r5 -...
Page 98 CategoryBCD396XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki ReadingTheDisplay PaulOpitz r10 - 13 May 2009 - 14:45 ScanMode PaulOpitz r7 - 12 May 2009 - 21:42 ScanningLegally PaulOpitz r7 - 24 Mar 2009 - 20:54 SearchAndStore PaulOpitz r4 - 24 Mar 2009 - 20:54 SearchFor PaulOpitz r7 -...
Page 99 CategoryBCD396XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki r5 - 14 Apr 2009 - 16:11 SettingAlerts PaulOpitz r5 - 17 Apr 2009 - 16:00 SettingUpTheHardware PaulOpitz r7 - 24 Mar 2009 - 21:07 Settings PaulOpitz r6 - 12 May 2009 - 18:21 SingleFrequencyP25TrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r8 - 13 May 2009 - 14:50...
Page 100 CategoryBCD396XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki PaulOpitz r6 - 12 May 2009 - 18:31 UnidenScannersUsersGuides PaulOpitz r16 - 13 May 2009 - 15:52 UsingQuickKeysStartupKeysAndSearchKeys PaulOpitz r4 - 24 Mar 2009 - 22:15 WXOperation PaulOpitz r8 - 12 May 2009 - 22:03 WarrantyAndSupportInformation PaulOpitz r7 -...
Page 101 CategoryBC346XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Results from UnidenMan4 web retrieved at 19:38 (GMT) AnalogEditChannel PaulOpitz r6 - 12 May 2009 - 15:11 AnalogProgramSystem PaulOpitz r7 - 13 May 2009 - 14:30 AnalogWXOperation PaulOpitz r5 - 12 May 2009 - 15:31 AvailableOperationModes PaulOpitz r15 -...
Page 102 CategoryBC346XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki BC346XTSpecs PaulOpitz r10 - 14 May 2009 - 19:09 BC346XTSrchCloCallOpt PaulOpitz r4 - 24 Mar 2009 - 16:14 BandScopeMode PaulOpitz r7 - 12 May 2009 - 17:17 CalculatingUpperBaseFrequencies PaulOpitz r6 - 08 May 2009 - 14:36 CategoryBC346XT PaulOpitz r2 -...
Page 103 CategoryBC346XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki r5 - 12 May 2009 - 20:00 EDACSSCATSystems PaulOpitz r7 - 13 May 2009 - 14:40 EDACSTrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r7 - 12 May 2009 - 20:14 EditBandPlan PaulOpitz r5 - 30 Mar 2009 - 17:16 EditGroup PaulOpitz r5 - 13 Apr 2009 - 20:25...
Page 104 CategoryBC346XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki PaulOpitz r7 - 24 Mar 2009 - 19:32 HoldMode PaulOpitz r6 - 12 May 2009 - 21:07 IntroductionToSAMEMessages PaulOpitz r8 - 12 May 2009 - 20:53 KeySafeMode PaulOpitz r7 - 13 May 2009 - 14:44 KeysAndTheirFunctions PaulOpitz r5 -...
Page 105 CategoryBC346XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki NumberTags PaulOpitz r6 - 14 Apr 2009 - 15:17 PriorityScan PaulOpitz r5 - 06 Apr 2009 - 22:25 ProgramLocation PaulOpitz r5 - 14 Apr 2009 - 15:22 ProgrammingLocations PaulOpitz r4 - 24 Mar 2009 - 20:43 PublishContribHistory PaulOpitz r30 -...
Page 106 CategoryBC346XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki r4 - 24 Mar 2009 - 20:54 SearchKeys PaulOpitz r5 - 14 Apr 2009 - 15:44 SearchWithScan PaulOpitz r6 - 14 Apr 2009 - 15:53 SetAlertTone PaulOpitz r4 - 24 Mar 2009 - 21:00 SetFrequencies PaulOpitz r7 - 13 May 2009 - 14:48...
Page 107 CategoryBC346XT < UnidenMan4 < TWiki PaulOpitz r4 - 24 Mar 2009 - 22:09 ToneOutFor PaulOpitz r7 - 14 Apr 2009 - 18:14 ToneOutMode PaulOpitz r6 - 12 May 2009 - 18:31 UnidenScannersUsersGuides PaulOpitz r16 - 13 May 2009 - 15:52 UsingQuickKeysStartupKeysAndSearchKeys PaulOpitz r4 -...
Page 108 CategoryUsersGuide < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Searched: CategoryUsersGuide Results from UnidenMan4 web retrieved at 19:38 (GMT) AnalogEditChannel PaulOpitz r6 - 12 May 2009 - 15:11 This menu lets you create channels and edit existing channels. All existing channels are listed in the order they were created: select the channel you want to edit ... AnalogProgramSystem PaulOpitz r7 -...
Page 109 CategoryUsersGuide < UnidenMan4 < TWiki BC346XT displays This page applies to the BC346XT. For other models, see: BCD396XT and BCD996XT Reading the Display BCT15X Reading the Display The display ... BC346XTHoldMode PaulOpitz r5 - 12 May 2009 - 15:48 BC346XT Hold mode Hold mode lets you edit the current frequency, system, site, or channel.
Page 110 Scope mode ... BCD996XTCloseCallMode PaulOpitz r7 - 12 May 2009 - 17:49 Close Call Mode This page applies only to the BCD996XT. For other models see: BCD396XT and BC346XT Close Call Mode BCT15X Band Scope Mode When the scanner ... BCD996XTGPSMode PaulOpitz...
Page 111 BCD996XTKeySafeMode PaulOpitz r6 - 12 May 2009 - 18:08 Key Safe Mode This page applies only to the BCD996XT. For other models see: BCD396XT and BC346XT Key Safe Mode BCT15X Key Safe Mode Key Safe mode locks out ... BCD996XTKeysAndTheirFunctions...
Page 112 CategoryUsersGuide < UnidenMan4 < TWiki PaulOpitz r4 - 12 May 2009 - 18:31 Tone Out mode This page applies only to the BCD996XT. For other models see: BCD396XT and BC346XT Tone Out Mode BCT15X Tone Out Mode With the tone out feature ... BCT15X...
Page 113 CategoryUsersGuide < UnidenMan4 < TWiki and BC346XT Hold Mode BCD996XT Hold Mode Hold mode lets you edit the current ... BCT15XKeySafeMode PaulOpitz r3 - 12 May 2009 - 19:23 Key Safe Mode This page applies only to the BCT15X. For other models see: BCD396XT and BC346XT Key Safe Mode BCD996XT Key Safe Mode Key Safe mode locks out ...
Page 114 PaulOpitz r7 - 12 May 2009 - 19:35 Tone Out mode This page applies only to the BCT15X. For other models see: BCD396XT and BC346XT Tone Out Mode BCD996XT Tone Out Mode With the tone out feature ... BandScopeMode PaulOpitz...
Page 115 PaulOpitz r7 - 12 May 2009 - 19:50 Close Call mode This page applies only to the BCD396XT and BC346XT. For other models see: BCT15X Close Call Mode BCD996XT Close Call Mode When the scanner ... ConnectingAGPSReceiver PaulOpitz r4 -...
Page 116 CategoryUsersGuide < UnidenMan4 < TWiki SCAT system ... EDACSTrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r7 - 12 May 2009 - 20:14 EDACS Trunked Systems This section deals with EDACS Wide or standard systems. Click here for information on EDACS SCAT systems. This includes EDACS systems that use ...
Page 117 PaulOpitz r7 - 12 May 2009 - 20:39 GPS mode This page applies only to the BCD396XT and BC346XT. For other models see: BCD996XT GPS Mode BCT15X GPS Mode You must have a compatible GPS receiver ... GeneralPrecautions PaulOpitz r7 -...
Page 118 CategoryUsersGuide < UnidenMan4 < TWiki r7 - 13 May 2009 - 14:44 Key Safe Mode This page applies only to the BCD396XT and BC346XT. For other models see: BCD996XT Key Safe Mode BCT15X Key Safe Mode Key Safe mode locks out ... KeysAndTheirFunctions PaulOpitz...
Page 119 CategoryUsersGuide < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Connecting a GPS receiver Compatible GPS receivers You can connect your scanner to any GPS receiver that meets the following criteria: Outputs NMEA 0183 v3.01 ... MobileSettingUpTheHardware PaulOpitz r6 - 12 May 2009 - 21:23 Included With Your Scanner Scanner AC Adapter Vehicle Accessory Power Cord Three Wire Harness Mounting Bracket and Hardware ...
Page 120 PublishContribHistory PaulOpitz r30 - 13 May 2009 - 15:26 Last Published Publisher PaulOpitz Date 13 May 2009 15:22 {PublishContrib}{Dir} D:/ twiki/pub/publish/ {PublishContrib}{URL} http://info.uniden.com/twiki/pub ... QuickKeys PaulOpitz r5 - 12 May 2009 - 21:30 Quick Keys Quick Keys let you enable or disable systems and channel groups during a scan.
Page 121 CategoryUsersGuide < UnidenMan4 < TWiki r10 - 13 May 2009 - 14:45 Reading the display This page applies to the BCD996XT and BCD396XT. For other models, see: BCT15X Reading the Display BC346XT Reading the Display The display ... ScanMode PaulOpitz...
Page 122 CategoryUsersGuide < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Search with Scan Set Quick Key Assign this search range to a Quick Key so you can easily enable or disable it during scanning. Enter a number from 0 to 99; tap ... SetAlertTone PaulOpitz r4 - 24 Mar 2009 - 21:00 Set Alert Tone Choose one of the 9 different tone patterns for the scanner to use for the...
Page 123 PaulOpitz r6 - 12 May 2009 - 18:21 Settings This page applies only to the BCD396XT and BC346XT. For other models see: BCD996XT Settings BCT15X Settings Set Backlight This menu lets you configure ... SingleFrequencyP25TrunkedSystems PaulOpitz r8 - 13 May 2009 - 14:50 Single Frequency P25 Trunked Systems Single frequency P25 systems are almost idfentical to standard P25 systems, except they only have one site per system and the ...
Page 124 PaulOpitz r6 - 12 May 2009 - 18:31 Tone Out mode This page applies only to the BCD396XT and BC346XT. For other models see: BCD996XT Tone Out Mode BCT15X Tone Out Mode With the tone out feature ... UnidenScannersUsersGuides PaulOpitz...
Page 125 Weather Alert (WX Alert) mode. Weather Scan Start a normal weather scan ... WarrantyAndSupportInformation PaulOpitz r7 - 24 Mar 2009 - 22:17 Warranty and Support Information Support Information Information online www.uniden. com Email support http://mycusthelp.com/uniden Phone support ... WeatherMode PaulOpitz r5 -...
Page 126: Using Preloaded Systems
Notes: This page applies to the BCD396XT, BCD996XT, and BC346XT. The BCT15X uses preprogrammed state-by-state data, instead. System information changes all the time. The preloaded systems were accurately programmed several months prior to first production.
Page 127 Norfolk VA Newport News VA Pittsburgh PA Portland OR Prescott AZ Nevada Shared Sacramento CA San Diego CA Seattle WA Tuscon AZ OklahomaStatewid Wichita KS BCD396XT / BCD996XT System 21 Alaska ALMR 22 Arkansas AWIN file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...mp/CDImage_090515/Manual/UsingPreloadedSystems.html (2 of 3)5/26/2009 11:12:18 AM...
Page 128 UsingPreloadedSystems < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 23 Colorado DTRS 24 Connecticut State 25 Delaware 26 Georgia GEWIN 27 Idaho IIMARS 28 Illinois StarCom21 29 Indiana SAFE-T 30 Kansas KSICS 31 Louisiana LATIE 32 Mass State System 33 Michigan MPSCS 34 Mississippi MWIN 35 Montana State System 36 North Carolina VIPER 37 Nevada SRS...
Page 129 BCD996XTFeatures < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Specifications Limits Channels: 25,000 maximum Systems: 500 maximum Groups per system: 20 maximum Talkgroups per trunked system: 500 maximum Channels per conventional system: 1000 maximum Scan Rate: 100 channels per second (conventional mode) Search Rate: 300 steps per second (on 5 kHz steps) System Quick Key range: 0-99 Group Quick Key range: 0-9 Custom Search Ranges: 10...
Page 130 BCD996XTFeatures < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Adaptive Digital Threshold - Automatically sets the digital decode threshold for APCO 25 systems EDACS ESK support Control Channel Data Output - allows the analysis of control channel data without the need to perform invasive modifications to the scanner Close Call RF Capture Close Call Temporary Store (last 10 hits) GPS Support for location-based scanning, location alerts, and crows-flight...
Page 131 BCD996XTFeatures < UnidenMan4 < TWiki (Itinerant) Custom Search - lets you program up to 10 search ranges SAME Weather Alert Weather Priority Priority Scan with Priority Plus Priority ID Scan on trunked systems Preemptive Priority on Motorola analog systems Quick-Access Search Keys Negative Channel dropout delay (forced resume) Signal Strength display LCD and Keypad Backlight...
Page 132 BCD996XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki BCD996XT Specs Certified in accordance with FCC Rules and Regulations Part 15 Subpart C as of date of manufacture. (See FCC Information for more details.) FCC ID: AMWUB360 BCD996XT Specs General Frequency Range Special Functions...
Page 133 BCD996XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Ext.SP Jack: 3.5mm (1/8 in.) Monaural Type REC.Out Jack: 3.5mm (1/8 in.) Stereo Type Ext. DC Power and Orange Wire Jack 3 pin (Center Orange Wire) DC Power Jack: 5.5mm (1/5 in.) (Center Positive) GPS/Remote Interface Jack: D Sub 9pin Male Type Remote Interfase Jack (front panel): 4-pin Mini Custom Type Internal Speaker 8.0Ω...
Page 134 BCD996XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Sensitivity (nominal) 12dB SINAD 0.3•V 25-27.995 MHz 0.3•V 28-53.98 MHz 0.5•V 54-71.95 MHz 0.2•V 72-75.995 MHz 0.5•V 76-107.9 MHz 0.3•V 108-136.9916 0.2•V 137-173.9875 0.5•V 174-215.95 MHz 0.3•V 216-224.98 MHz 0.3•V 225-379.975 MHz 0.3•V 380-512 MHz 0.3•V 758-960 MHz 0.4•V...
Page 135 BCD996XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 54dB 54-71.95 MHz 48dB 72-75.995 MHz 60dB 76-107.9 MHz 50dB 108-136.9916 41dB 137-173.9875 54dB 174-215.95 MHz 41dB 216-224.98 MHz 50dB 225-379.975 MHz 40dB 380-512 MHz 41dB 758-960 MHz 37dB 1240-1300 MHz Close Call Sensitivity (nominal) 140•V VHF Low1 Band 100•V...
Page 136 BCD996XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 110•V UHF Band 180•V 800MHz+ Band Frequency Range Frequency Range Modulation Step Name (MHz) (kHz) 25.0000-26.9600 Petroleum Products & Broadcast Pickup 26.9650-27.4050 CB Class D Channel 27.4100-27.9950 Business & Forest Products 28.0000-29.6800 10 Meter Amateur Band 29.7000-49.9900 VHF Low Band 50.0000-53.9800...
Page 137 BCD996XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 148.0000-150.7875 12.5 Military Land Mobile 150.8000-161.9950 VHF High Band 162.0000-173.9875 12.5 Federal Government 174.0000-215.9500 VHF TV 216.0000-224.9800 1.25 Meter Amateur Band 225.0000-379.9750 Military Aircraft Band 380.0000-399.9875 12.5 Military Land Mobile 400.0000-405.9875 12.5 Miscellaneous 406.0000-419.9875 12.5 Federal Government Land Mobile 420.0000-449.9875...
Page 138 BCD996XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Special Functions Band Scope Function Frequency Span 0.2 MHz To 500 MHz Frequency Step 5 kHz To 100 kHz Two-Tone-Sequential 250.0-3500.0Hz , 0.1Hz Step Programmable WX Alert 1050 Hz Tone System NWR-SAME System (Warning / Watch / Advisory) Supported trunking systems Motorola Systems: Type I, II, II/I (hybrid) EDACS Systems: FM, NFM, and SCAT...
Page 139 BCD996XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki CTCSS Tone Frequencies - 50 frequencies total (Hz) 67.0 69.3 71.9 74.4 77.0 79.7 82.5 85.4 88.5 91.5 94.8 97.4 100.0 103.5 107.2 110.9 114.8 118.8 123.0 127.3 131.8 136.5 141.3 146.2 151.4 156.7 159.8 162.2 165.5 167.9...
Page 140 BCD996XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki This page applies to the following scanners: BCD996XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20...ents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCD996XTSpecs.html (9 of 9)5/26/2009 11:12:21 AM...
Page 141: Available Operation Modes
When the signal stops, the scanner continues the scan. For information about key operation and other specifics about Scan Mode: BCD396XT and BC346XT: Hand Held Scanner Scan Mode BCD996XT: BCD996XT Scan Mode file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D.../CDImage_090515/Manual/AvailableOperationModes.html (1 of 8)5/26/2009 11:12:22 AM...
Page 142 BCD396XT and BC346XT: Hand Held Scanner Search Mode BCD996XT: BCD996XT Search Mode BCT15X: BCT15X Search Mode To enter Search mode, FUNCTION+ tap SCAN . The scanner asks if you want to perform the Quick Search: tap YES if this is the search you want.
Page 143: Close Call Priority Mode
BC346XT, FUNCTION + repeatedly tap HOLD until Close Call Pri appears. To enter Close Call mode on the BCD996XT, repeatedly tap the SQ knob until Close Call Pri appears. To enter Close Call mode on the BCT15X, Function + repeatedly tap the SQ knob until Close Call Pri appears.
Page 144: Close Call Do Not Disturb Mode
BCD396XT or BC346XT, FUNCTION + press & hold HOLD. To enter Close Call only mode on the BCD996XT, press and hold the SQ knob. To enter Close Call only mode on the BCT15X, FUNCTION + press & hold the SQ knob.
Page 145 2. FUNCTION + repeatedly tap NO until the scanner displays Priority Mode Plus On. To enter Priority Plus Scan mode on the BCD996XT, press PRI until the scanner displays Priority Mode Plus On. To enter Priority Plus Scan mode on the BCT15X, FUNCTION +...
Page 146 To enter Weather mode on the BCD396XT or BC346XT, FUNCTION + press & hold WX. To enter Weather mode on the BCD996XT, press & hold WX. To enter Weather mode on the BCT15X, FUNCTION + press and hold GPS/WX. Weather Priority Mode In Weather Priority mode, the scanner interrupts scanning every 5 seconds to check for an alert.
Page 147 BCD396XT or BC346XT, FUNCTION + tap WX. To enter Weather Priority mode on the BCD996XT, tap WX. To enter Weather Priority mode on the BCT15X, FUNCTION + tap GPS/ Weather Alert mode This is similar to Weather mode: the scanner checks each of the 10 National Weather Radio channels and stays on a channel when it detects a signal.
Page 148 For more information about Band Scope Mode: BCD396XT or BC346XT: Hand Held Band Scope Mode BCD996XT: BCD996XT Band Scope Mode BCT15X: BCT15X Band Scope Mode To enter Band Scope Mode: 1. Set one of the 3 search keys to a Band Scope search.
Page 149 To go back one level in the menu, tap MENU . To exit the menu, press LOCKOUT . The scanner goes back to the operating mode it was in before you entered the menu. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCD996XTMenuTree.html5/26/2009 11:12:23 AM...
Page 150 BCD996XTKeysAndTheirFunctions < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Keys and their functions Key Overview Operating the controls Using the FUNCTION button Key functions in different operation modes Key Overview The diagram below shows the keys and what they are called throughout the guide: Operating the controls Each button has at least two different actions which you control using the key combinations explained below.
Page 151 BCD996XTKeysAndTheirFunctions < UnidenMan4 < TWiki GPS mode key functions Tone Out mode key functions Band Scope mode key functions Available functions in Key Safe mode This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...ge_090515/Manual/BCD996XTKeysAndTheirFunctions.html (2 of 2)5/26/2009 11:12:25 AM...
Page 152: Reading The Display
ReadingTheDisplay < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Reading the display This page applies to the BCD996XT and BCD396XT. For other models, see: BCT15X Reading the Display BC346XT Reading the Display The display icons vary depending on the status of the scanner and what youre doing at any given time.
Page 153 ReadingTheDisplay < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Blinking icon: The battery is low. (If the AC adapter is connected while the icon is blinking, the battery is incorrectly installed, is the wrong type, or has gone bad.) Channel info icon This icon has several available states: P25: The received signal is digitized voice (APCO P25) LNK: The current channel is configured as a...
Page 154 ReadingTheDisplay < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Reversed (filled) icon: Steady: Close call DND mode is on. Blinking: Close call DND mode is on, and the scanner has detected a close call signal. Function icon Steady: You tapped the FUNCTION key; the scanner will remember the FUNCTION + key combination for the next 3 seconds.
Page 155 ReadingTheDisplay < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Modulation icon This icon displays the modulation type of the current channel: AM, FM, NFM, FMB, or WFM. Priority icon The current channel is set as a priority channel. Priority scan icon (PRI) Steady: Priority scan is turned on. Blinking: Priority Plus scan is turned on.
Page 156 ReadingTheDisplay < UnidenMan4 < TWiki This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCD396XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Do...ts/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/ReadingTheDisplay.html (5 of 5)5/26/2009 11:12:26 AM...
Page 157: Included With Your Scanner
MobileSettingUpTheHardware < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Included With Your Scanner Setting Up Your Scanner Power Related Issues Base Station Setting Up an Audio Recording Device or Computer Recording Vehicle Installation Mounting Using the Bracket Mounting Using the DIN-E Sleeve (Option for BCT15X) Removing the Scanner from the DIN-E Sleeve Mounting Using ISO Technique Removing the Display Sticker...
Page 158: Setting Up Your Scanner
MobileSettingUpTheHardware < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Mounting Sleeve and keys (Optional for BCT15X; Included with BCD996XT) Setting Up Your Scanner These guidelines will help you install and set up your new scanner: The scanner can be placed on a convenient surface in your home as a base station, and connected to a standard outlet that supplies 120VAC, 60Hz. You must use either the supplied antenna or an electrically correct outdoor antenna, properly and safely mounted at your chosen site.
Page 159 MobileSettingUpTheHardware < UnidenMan4 < TWiki To secure the radio to a surface, by means of the mounting bracket, follow the steps below: 1. Attach the four protective mounting feet to the mounting bracket when you casually use the scanner on a flat surface. Should you desire to permanently mount the scanner, remove the feet and use wood screws through the bracket as described in Steps 2 and 3.
Page 160 MobileSettingUpTheHardware < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 1. Using appropriate screws or other hardware, secure the bracket. 2. Insert the scanner and insert the bracket knobs to lock the scanner in position. 3. Attach the Cigarette Lighter Power Cord to the rear of the scanner and plug the adapter end into a dash mounted 12V DC socket. 4.
Page 161 MobileSettingUpTheHardware < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 1. Remove the bracket if it is attached. 2. Remove the four Philips screws from four small tabs on the rear of the case that secure the outer metal case and pull off the case (toward the rear) with care.
Page 162 To begin the process, it is first necessary to remove the scanner’s outer metal sleeve from the inner chassis. Unthread the four screws in the rear of the unit. Slide the cover toward the rear and off. Once the sleeve is removed, you will see threaded, metric machine screw holes on either side of the chassis cabinet. Uniden does not supply these screws.
Page 163 Never connect any part of the headphone jack to the antenna jack or connect the radio to an installation where the antenna and audio connection are grounded. This might also damage the scanner. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...Image_090515/Manual/MobileSettingUpTheHardware.html (7 of 7)5/26/2009 11:12:32 AM...
Page 164 MobileConnectingAGPSReceiver < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Connecting a GPS receiver To determine whether the information on this page applies to your scanner, see the tags at the bottom of the page. Compatible GPS receivers Configuring your scanner Connecting the receiver Troubleshooting Compatible GPS receivers You can connect your scanner to any GPS receiver that meets the following criteria: Outputs NMEA-0183 v3.01-compliant location data...
Page 165 MobileConnectingAGPSReceiver < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 1. Plug your GPS receiver's RS232 cable directly into the DB9 connector on the back of the scanner. 2. When the scanner recognizes the GPS input, it displays a confirmation message and shows the GPS icon on the display. 3.
Page 166 2. Check the range, latitude, and longitude settings to make sure they are correct. 3. Make sure the Set GPS Enable option is set to Yes . This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...age_090515/Manual/MobileConnectingAGPSReceiver.html (3 of 3)5/26/2009 11:12:33 AM...
Page 167: Number Tags
NumberTags < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Number Tags Number Tags let you quickly navigate to a specific system or channel. You can assign Number Tags at the system level ( System Number Tag , or SNT), at the channel level ( CHannel Number Tag , or CHNT), or at both levels. You can assign an SNT to the temporary system Close Call Hits that is created during Close Call...
Page 168: Assigning A Chnt
NumberTags < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 3. Enter the number tag you want to use for the Close Call Hits system. To a service search range : 1. Open the Search for... menu. 2. Select Edit Service, then select the service search range you want to assign the number tag to.
Page 169 CHNT; if you select the same CHNT again, it will go to the 2nd channel assigned with that CHNT, and so on). This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/NumberTags.html (3 of 3)5/26/2009 11:12:33 AM...
Page 170 QuickKeys < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Quick Keys Quick Keys let you enable or disable systems and channel groups during a scan. Disabled systems and channel groups are ignored during scans. You can assign Quick Keys at the system/site level ( System/site Quick Key , or SQK ), at the channel group level ( Group Quick Key , or GQK ), or at both levels.
Page 171: Assigning A Gqk
QuickKeys < UnidenMan4 < TWiki To a trunked system: 1. Open the Program System menu. 2. Select the system you want to assign the Quick Key to. 3. Select Edit Site, then select the site you want. 4. Select Set Quick Key, then enter the Quick Key you want to use for this site.
Page 172: To Use Sqk 0 Through
QuickKeys < UnidenMan4 < TWiki You can only use GQKs within the current system: the GQK will not affect a channel group in another system. GQKs range from 0 to 9 . 1. Open the Program System menu. 2. Select the system containing the channel group you want to assign the Quick Key 3.
Page 173 Any channel groups assigned to this GQK within the current system only become disabled. (If they were already disabled, they become enabled.) This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/QuickKeys.html (4 of 4)5/26/2009 11:12:34 AM...
Page 174 SearchKeys < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Search Keys The scanner has three Search Keys that you can assign to a special search range; the Search Keys are set to number keys 1 , 2 , and 3 : Search Key 1 Search Key 2 Search Key 3 Programming Search Keys...
Page 175 SearchKeys < UnidenMan4 < TWiki This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/SearchKeys.html (2 of 2)5/26/2009 11:12:35 AM...
Page 176: Programming Locations
ProgrammingLocations < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Programming locations To use Location-based Scanning with a particular system, you will need to program your scanner with the geographic coordinates you want to use for each site or channel group. You can also program your scanner to alert you when you approach particular locations. Programming a location for a site Programming a location for a channel group Programming general locations...
Page 177: To Create A New Location
ProgrammingLocations < UnidenMan4 < TWiki can effect that site or channel group. Programming general locations You can program general locations (i.e., locations that are not associated with a site or channel group). There are three types of general locations: points of interest ( POI ) intersections ( Dangerous Xing ) roads ( Dangerous Road ) You can program the scanner to alert you when you come within a designated distance of that...
Page 178: Edit An Existing Location
3. Select the location you want to edit, then change any of the location settings you want. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...emp/CDImage_090515/Manual/ProgrammingLocations.html (3 of 3)5/26/2009 11:12:36 AM...
Page 179: Setting Alerts
SettingAlerts < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Setting alerts Your scanner can trigger alerts for several different events. The table below shows the different alerts and how to program them: To sound an alert when Follow these steps A channel becomes active Edit the channel properties (Edit Channel#Set...
Page 180 SettingAlerts < UnidenMan4 < TWiki The scanner detects a Close Call hit Edit the Close Call properties: 1. Go to the Close Call menu. 2. Select Set CC Alert . 3. Choose the Alert Tone and Alert Light you want the scanner to use. 4.
Page 181 SettingAlerts < UnidenMan4 < TWiki This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BC346XT BCD396XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/SettingAlerts.html (3 of 3)5/26/2009 11:12:37 AM...
Page 182 Search Keys let you quickly start one of 3 programmed searches. To start the search assigned to a Search Key, FUNCTION + tap that Search Key. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Docu...515/Manual/UsingQuickKeysStartupKeysAndSearchKeys.html5/26/2009 11:12:38 AM...
Page 183 BCD996XTToneOutMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Tone Out mode This page applies only to the BCD996XT. For other models see: BCD396XT and BC346XT Tone Out Mode BCT15X Tone Out Mode With the tone out feature, the scanner monitors up to 10 different channels for paging tones (two-tone sequential, single tone, and group tone).
Page 184 BCD996XTToneOutMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki If you want to search a different channel, just turn the SCROLL knob until you find the channel you want. To exit Tone-Out mode, tap SCAN. To hear all transmissions on a tone-out frequency, even when a tone-out has not been activated, press HOLD.
Page 185 BCD996XTToneOutMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki FUNCTION Toggle the attenuator + Press & state for all signals. hold Key Name (2nd operation) Menu . / No (Decimal) Yes (Enter) Action on: Enter the Menu Enter a decimal point or Enter a digit in Direct Go to the Mode.
Page 186 SCROLL - FUNCTION Rotate Select the Tone Out to use. Activate the FUNCTION mode for the next keypress. Press & Hold Lock the FUNCTION mode. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT UsersGuide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%2...mp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCD996XTToneOutMode.html (4 of 4)5/26/2009 11:12:40 AM...
Page 187 BCD996XTCloseCallMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Close Call Mode This page applies only to the BCD996XT. For other models see: BCD396XT and BC346XT Close Call Mode BCT15X Band Scope Mode When the scanner is in Close Call mode, it performs a close call check every 2 seconds. The scanner switches to the selected bands and searches for unusually strong signals (indicating the transmitter is probably somewhere close by).
Page 188 BCD996XTCloseCallMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Toggle Weather Turn on/off the associated Close Call range. Priority Mode FUNCTION Toggle Weather When monitoring a + Tap Priority Mode frequency, toggle the IF for that frequency. Press & Go to Weather Hold Scan mode. When Toggle Weather Input the corresponding number in Direct Entry mode.
Page 189 BCD996XTCloseCallMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key Name (2nd Menu operation) . / No (Decimal) Yes (Enter) Action on: Enter the Menu If stopped on a Mode. frequency, store the current frequency. FUNCTION Enter the Close + Tap Call Menu. When Enter the Menu Input the corresponding key in Direct Entry Accept entered value...
Page 190 "Latch" the FUNCTION mode. Scanner stays on the current unlock all search system and all keypresses use the FUNCTION mode until frequencies. you tap the control again. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20...p/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCD996XTCloseCallMode.html (4 of 4)5/26/2009 11:12:42 AM...
Page 191 BCD996XTBandScopeMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki This page applies only to the BCD996XT. For other models see: BCD396XT and BC346XT Band Scope Mode BCT15X Band Scope Mode Band Scope mode Band Scope mode is a special type of Search mode where the scanner displays the strength of any signal it finds.
Page 192 BCD996XTBandScopeMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key Operation in Band Scope Mode Key Name (2nd PRIORITY operation) 1 (Search 1) 2 (Search 2) 3 (Search 3) Action On FUNCTION Start the search range assigned to this Search Key. + Tap file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20...p/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCD996XTBandScopeMode.html (2 of 5)5/26/2009 11:12:45 AM...
Page 193 BCD996XTBandScopeMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key Name (2nd Weather operation) 4 (IF exchange) 5 (Level offset) 6 (Display mode) Action on: Toggle Weather Priority Mode FUNCTION Toggle Weather Toggle the IF for that the + Tap Priority Mode current frequency. Press &...
Page 194 BCD996XTBandScopeMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Enter the Menu Press to enter the Band Set the marker Mode. Scope Setting mode and frequency as the select a setting. The center frequency. selected setting flashes. In Band Scope Setting In Band Scope Setting mode, with CF mode, selects the next selected edit the...
Page 195 In Band Scope setting Activate the FUNCTION mode for the next keypress. mode, return to the normal Band Scope mode. Function + Tap Restart the Band Scope. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT UsersGuide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20...p/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCD996XTBandScopeMode.html (5 of 5)5/26/2009 11:12:45 AM...
Page 196 BCD996XTGPSMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki GPS Mode This page applies only to the BCD996XT. For other models see: BCD396XT and BC346XT GPS Mode BCT15X GPS Mode You must have a compatible GPS receiver connected! GPS Mode See Also Reading the display in GPS mode...
Page 197 BCD996XTGPSMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Direction of Travel Current Time Current Speed Current Elevation OFF indicates no POI is selected ETA / Clock / Elevation / Speed Display These displays are available if you select a POI. Large arrow shows direction to the POI Current Direction of Travel Distance to the POI Upper right corner depends on display mode:...
Page 198 BCD996XTGPSMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Latitude of current location Longtitude of current location OFF if no POI selected, otherwise the name of the POI Location Alert display Location Alert Type Distance to Alert location Location Alert Name Direction to Alert location ALERT indicator also flashes when you approach a Dangerous Crossing or Dangerous Road Location review display...
Page 199 BCD996XTGPSMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Press & Overwrite the Unlock all locations Hold selected location of the current type with the current (POI, Dangerous location. Road, Dangous Crossing) FUNCTION Display "Unlock All + Press & Locations?" If you Hold press E/YES all locations of all types are unlocked.
Page 200 Function Quickly skip to the location Return to previous + Rotate starting with the next operation. alphabetic character. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20...ts/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCD996XTGPSMode.html (5 of 5)5/26/2009 11:12:47 AM...
Page 201 BCT15XFeatures < UnidenMan4 < TWiki BCT15X Features Limits Channels: 9,000 maximum Systems: 500 maximum Sites: 1000 maximum, 256 maximum per system Groups per system: 20 maximum Talkgroups per trunked system: 500 maximum Scan Rate: 100 channels per second (conventional mode) System Quick Key range: 0-99 Group Quick Key range: 0-9 Custom Search Ranges: 10...
Page 202 BCT15XFeatures < UnidenMan4 < TWiki BearTracker warning system Location-Based scanning automatically selects programmed systems based on your location when connected to a compatible GPS receiver. Temporary lockout automatically unlocks channels when you cycle power. Startup Configurations let you automatically lock out or unlock systems on power up to quickly configure the scanner for a different area or application.
Page 203 BCT15XFeatures < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Negative Channel Dropout Delay (Forced Resume Adjustable Hold (scan duration 0-255 sec) per system, custom or service search Strong signal attenuation Upgradeable firmware Channel Alert Independent Alert Tone Volume - lets you set the volume level of the following tones: Key Beep, Emergency Alert, Channel Alert, and Close Call Alert.
Page 204 BCT15XSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki BCT15X Specs To determine whether the information on this page applies to your scanner, see the tags at the bottom of the page. Certified in accordance with FCC Rules and Regulations Part 15 Subpart C as of date of manufacture.
Page 205 BCT15XSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Phone Jack: 3.5mm (1/8 in.) Stereo Type Ext.SP Jack: 3.5mm (1/8 in.) Monaural Type REC.Out Jack: 3.5mm (1/8 in.) Stereo Type Ext. DC Power and Orange Wire Jack 3 pin (Center Orange Wire) DC Power Jack: 5.5mm (1/5 in.) (Center Positive) GPS/Remote Interface Jack: D Sub 9pin Male Type Remote Interfase Jack (front panel): 4-pin Mini Custom Type Internal Speaker...
Page 206 BCT15XSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Sensitivity (nominal) 12dB SINAD 0.4•V 25-27.995 MHz 0.3•V 28-53.98 MHz 0.6•V 54-71.95 MHz 0.2•V 72-75.995 MHz 0.5•V 76-107.9 MHz 0.3•V 108-136.9916 0.3•V 137-173.9875 0.5•V 174-215.95 MHz 0.3•V 216-224.98 MHz 0.3•V 225-379.975 MHz 0.3•V 380-512 MHz 0.3•V 758-960 MHz 0.4•V...
Page 207 BCT15XSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 54dB 54-71.95 MHz 48dB 72-75.995 MHz 60dB 76-107.9 MHz 50dB 108-136.9916 41dB 137-173.9875 54dB 174-215.95 MHz 41dB 216-224.98 MHz 50dB 225-379.975 MHz 40dB 380-512 MHz 41dB 758-960 MHz 37dB 1240-1300 MHz Close Call Sensitivity (nominal) 160•V VHF Low1 Band 110•V...
Page 208 BCT15XSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 110•V UHF Band 160•V 800MHz+ Band Frequency Range Frequency Range Modulation Step Name (MHz) (kHz) 25.0000-26.9600 Petroleum Products & Broadcast Pickup 26.9650-27.4050 CB Class D Channel 27.4100-27.9950 Business & Forest Products 28.0000-29.6800 10 Meter Amateur Band 29.7000-49.9900 VHF Low Band 50.0000-53.9800...
Page 209 BCT15XSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 148.0000-150.7875 12.5 Military Land Mobile 150.8000-161.9950 VHF High Band 162.0000-173.9875 12.5 Federal Government 174.0000-215.9500 VHF TV 216.0000-224.9800 1.25 Meter Amateur Band 225.0000-379.9750 Military Aircraft Band 380.0000-399.9875 12.5 Military Land Mobile 400.0000-405.9875 12.5 Miscellaneous 406.0000-419.9875 12.5 Federal Government Land Mobile 420.0000-449.9875...
Page 210 BCT15XSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Special Functions Band Scope Function Frequency Span 0.2 MHz To 500 MHz Frequency Step 5 kHz To 100 kHz Two-Tone-Sequential 250.0-3500.0Hz , 0.1Hz Step Programmable WX Alert 1050 Hz Tone System NWR-SAME System (Warning / Watch / Advisory) Supported trunking systems Motorola Systems: Type I, II, II/I (hybrid) EDACS Systems: FM, NFM, and SCAT...
Page 211 BCT15XSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki CTCSS Tone Frequencies - 50 frequencies total (Hz) 67.0 69.3 71.9 74.4 77.0 79.7 82.5 85.4 88.5 91.5 94.8 97.4 100.0 103.5 107.2 110.9 114.8 118.8 123.0 127.3 131.8 136.5 141.3 146.2 151.4 156.7 159.8 162.2 165.5 167.9...
Page 212 BCT15XSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki This page applies to the following scanners: BCT15X Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCT15XSpecs.html (9 of 9)5/26/2009 11:12:50 AM...
Page 213 BCT15XMenuTree < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Menu tree BCT15X main menu Program System Program Location Srch/CloCall Opt Search for... Set Bear Tracker Close Call Priority Scan WX Operation Tone-Out for... Wired Clone Settings Using the menu To open the menu, tap MENU . Turn the Scroll/Function knob to move the cursor and highlight menu items.
Page 214 BCT15XKeysAndTheirFunctions < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Keys and their functions Key Overview Operating the controls Using the FUNCTION button Key functions in different operation modes Key Overview The diagram below shows the keys and what they are called throughout the guide: Operating the controls Each button has at least two different actions which you control using the key combinations explained below.
Page 215 BCT15XKeysAndTheirFunctions < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key functions in different operation modes The keys have different functions in each operation mode: Scan and Search mode key functions Hold mode key functions Close Call mode key functions Priority Scan mode key functions GPS mode key functions Tone Out mode key functions Band Scope mode key functions...
Page 216 BCT15X displays This page applies to the BCT15X. For other models, see: BCD396XT and BCD996XT Reading the Display BC346XT Reading the Display The display icons vary depending on the status of the scanner and what youre doing at any given time.
Page 217 BCT15XReadingTheDisplay < UnidenMan4 < TWiki General Display when Function is pressed Alert Mute icon Steady: You have turned on permanent alert mute. Blinking: Temporary alert mute is activated. Attenuator icon Steady: The attenuator is turned on for the current channel. Blinking: The attenuator is turned on globally (for all channels).
Page 218 BCT15XReadingTheDisplay < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Reversed (filled) icon: Steady: Close call DND mode is on. Blinking: Close call DND mode is on, and the scanner has detected a close call signal. Function icon Steady: You tapped the FUNCTION key; the scanner will remember the FUNCTION + key combination for the next 3 seconds.
Page 219 BCT15XReadingTheDisplay < UnidenMan4 < TWiki REP icon The Repeater Find feature is turned on. Signal level icon This icon displays the strength of the current signal; the icon ranges from zero bars (no signal) to five bars (strong signal). State-by-State icons PL: Indicates the Local Police search is turned on.
Page 220 BCT15XReadingTheDisplay < UnidenMan4 < TWiki also have 2 or 3 different displays you can cycle through. Band Scope mode display Hold mode displays GPS mode display This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCT15X Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20...CDImage_090515/Manual/BCT15XReadingTheDisplay.html (5 of 5)5/26/2009 11:12:55 AM...
Page 221 StatebyStateScanning < UnidenMan4 < TWiki State-by-State Scanning BCT15X comes preprogrammed with many of the channels used by local police, department of transportation, and highwaypatrol agencies, organized by state. You can also assign a state to the systems you program so that they can be included in State-by- State scanning.
Page 222 BearTrackerWarningSystem < UnidenMan4 < TWiki BearTracker Warning System The BearTracker Warning System (BWS) alerts you to nearby public safety radio activity. This can give you an advanced warning of police activity and other hazards when you are driving. The earliest BWS implementations primarily monitored for the frequencies used by mobile radio extenders -- radio units installed in patrol cars that extended the range of the officer's handheld radio.
Page 223 BearTrackerWarningSystem < UnidenMan4 < TWiki This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCT15X Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...CDImage_090515/Manual/BearTrackerWarningSystem.html (2 of 2)5/26/2009 11:12:56 AM...
Page 224 This page applies only to the BCT15X. For other models see: BCD396XT and BC346XT Tone Out Mode BCD996XT Tone Out Mode With the tone out feature, the scanner monitors up to 10 different channels for paging tones (two-tone sequential, single tone, and group tone). Normally, the scanner monitors each of the 10 channels in turn.
Page 225 BCT15XToneOutMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki To hear all transmissions on a tone-out frequency, even when a tone-out has not been activated, press HOLD. To return to Tone-Out Search mode, press HOLD again. Key Operation in Tone Out Mode Key Name (2nd operation) Police /...
Page 226 BCT15XToneOutMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key Name (2nd Menu operation) . / No (Decimal) Yes (Enter) Action on: Enter the Menu Enter a decimal point or Enter a digit in Direct Go to the Mode. "i" in Direct Entry mode. Entry mode.
Page 227 BCT15XToneOutMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key Name (2nd operation) LOCKOUT Action on: SCROLL - FUNCTION Rotate Select the Tone Out to use. Activate the FUNCTION mode for the next keypress. Press & Hold Lock the FUNCTION mode. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCT15X UsersGuide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20.../temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCT15XToneOutMode.html (4 of 4)5/26/2009 11:12:59 AM...
Page 228 This page applies only to the BCT15X. For other models see: BCD396XT and BC346XT Close Call Mode BCD996XT Close Call Mode When the scanner is in Close Call mode, it performs a close call check every 2 seconds. The scanner switches to the selected bands and searches for unusually strong signals (indicating the transmitter is probably somewhere close by).
Page 229 BCT15XCloseCallMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki FUNCTION Start scanning in When monitoring a + Tap Alert Plus mode. frequency, toggle the IF for that frequency. Press & Hold When Same functions as Input the corresponding number in Direct Entry mode. holding on a normal Close Call frequency mode.
Page 230 BCT15XCloseCallMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki FUNCTION Enter the Close + Tap Call Menu. When Enter the Menu Input the corresponding key in Direct Entry Accept entered value holding on a Mode. mode. for Direct Entry frequency mode. Key Name (2nd operation) Action on: SQUELCH...
Page 231 BCT15XCloseCallMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Rotate If stopped on a Close Call, resume Close Call. If stopped on a frequency, Activate the FUNCTION mode for the next keypress. temporarily lockout the frequency. Function + Tap Go to the lockout review mode.
Page 232 This page applies only to the BCT15X. For other models see: BCD396XT and BC346XT Band Scope Mode BCD996XT Band Scope Mode Band Scope mode Band Scope mode is a special type of Search mode where the scanner displays the strength of any signal it finds.
Page 233 BCT15XBandScopeMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key Operation in Band Scope Mode Key Name (2nd operation) Police/DOT/ PRIORITY 1 (Search 1) 2 (Search 2) 3 (Search 3) Action On Go to Scan Mode. FUNCTION Start the search range assigned to this Search Key. + Tap file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20...emp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCT15XBandScopeMode.html (2 of 5)5/26/2009 11:13:04 AM...
Page 234 BCT15XBandScopeMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key Name (2nd operation) Highway Patrol / 4 (IF exchange) 5 (Level offset) 6 (Display mode) <nop>BearTracker / Action on: Alert Go to Scan Mode. FUNCTION Go into Alert Plus Toggle the IF for that the + Tap mode and start current frequency.
Page 235 BCT15XBandScopeMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key Name (2nd operation) Action on: SQUELCH VOLUME SCAN/SEARCH HOLD/RESUME Rotate Adjust Squelch. Adjust volume. Turn fully counterclockwise past click to turn off scanner. Stop the alert tone Change backlight level. Resume scanning. Hold on the current and set the scanner to frequency.
Page 236 BCT15XBandScopeMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki In Band Scope setting mode, Activate the FUNCTION mode for the next keypress. return to the normal Band Scope mode. Function + Tap Restart the Band Scope. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCT15X UsersGuide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20...emp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCT15XBandScopeMode.html (5 of 5)5/26/2009 11:13:04 AM...
Page 237 BCT15XGPSMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki GPS Mode This page applies only to the BCT15X. For other models see: BCD396XT and BC346XT GPS Mode BCD996XT GPS Mode You must have a compatible GPS receiver connected! GPS Mode See Also Reading the display in GPS mode...
Page 238 BCT15XGPSMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Direction of Travel Current Time Current Speed Current Elevation OFF indicates no POI is selected ETA / Clock / Elevation / Speed Display These displays are available if you select a POI. Large arrow shows direction to the POI Current Direction of Travel Distance to the POI Upper right corner depends on display mode:...
Page 239 BCT15XGPSMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Latitude of current location Longtitude of current location OFF if no POI selected, otherwise the name of the POI Location Alert display Location Alert Type Distance to Alert location Location Alert Name Direction to Alert location ALERT indicator also flashes when you approach a Dangerous Crossing or Dangerous Road Location review display...
Page 240 BCT15XGPSMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Press & Overwrite the Unlock all locations Hold selected location of the current type with the current (POI, Dangerous location. Road, Dangous Crossing) FUNCTION Display "Unlock All + Press & Locations?" If you Hold press E/YES all locations of all types are unlocked.
Page 241 BCT15XGPSMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Function Go to the menu mode to Temporary lockout the Switch between GPS + Tap edit the current location. current location alert display modes. if one is active. Name (2nd operation) SQUELCH Action on: VOLUME SCAN/SEARCH HOLD/RESUME SCROLL - FUNCTION...
Page 242 BCD396XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki BCD396XT Specs To determine whether the information on this page applies to your scanner, see the tags at the bottom of the page. Certified in accordance with FCC Rules and Regulations Part 15 Subpart C as of date of manufacture.
Page 243 BCD396XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki DC Power Jack: EIAJ TYPE-II(Center Positive) GPS/Remote Interface Jack: 4pin Mini Type Internal Speaker 24Ω, 0.8 W Max.(1.26 in.) Power Requirements 3 x AA Size Rechargeable Ni-MH Batteries (2300mAh) 3 x AA size Alkaline Batteries AC Adapter (6V DC 800mA Regulated) (AD-1001) Operating Nominal: -20°C to +60°...
Page 244 BCD396XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 0.5•V 54—71.95 MHz 0.2•V 72—75.995 MHz 0.4•V 76—107.9 MHz 0.3•V 108—136.9916 0.3•V 137—173.9875 0.5•V 174—215.95 MHz 0.3•V 216—224.98 MHz 0.3•V 225—379.975 MHz 0.3•V 380—512 MHz 0.3•V 758—960 MHz 0.5•V 1240—1300 MHz Signal Noise Ratio (nominal) 50dB 25—27.995 MHz 41dB...
Page 245 BCD396XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 50dB 108—136.9916 41dB 137—173.9875 55dB 174—215.95 MHz 40dB 216—224.98 MHz 51dB 225—379.975 MHz 40dB 380—512 MHz 41dB 758—960 MHz 37dB 1240—1300 MHz Close Call Sensitivity (nominal) 350•V VHF Low1 Band 160•V VHF Low2 Band 70•V Air Band 60•V VHF High1 Band...
Page 246 BCD396XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Frequency Range Modulation Step Name (MHz) (kHz) 25.0000—26.9600 Petroleum Products & Broadcast Pickup 26.9650—27.4050 CB Class D Channel 27.4100—27.9950 Business & Forest Products 28.0000—29.6800 10 Meter Amateur Band 29.7000—49.9900 VHF Low Band 50.0000—53.9800 6 Meter Amateur Band 54.0000—71.9500 VHF TV 72.0000—75.9950...
Page 247 BCD396XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 216.0000—224.9800 1.25 Meter Amateur Band 225.0000—379.9750 Military Aircraft Band 380.0000—399.9875 12.5 Military Land Mobile 400.0000—405.9875 12.5 Miscellaneous 406.0000—419.9875 12.5 Federal Government Land Mobile 420.0000—449.9875 12.5 70 cm Amateur Band 450.0000—469.9875 12.5 UHF Standard Band 470.0000—512.0000 12.5 UHF TV 758.0000—787.99375...
Page 248 BCD396XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 250.0-3500.0Hz , 0.1Hz Step Programmable WX Alert 1050 Hz Tone System NWR-SAME System (Warning / Watch / Advisory) Supported trunking systems Motorola Systems: Type I, II, II/I (hybrid) EDACS Systems: FM, NFM, and SCAT LTR Systems APCO Systems: Astro Imbe, Astro 25 Dynamic memory allocation capacity Systems: 500 max...
Page 249 BCD396XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 203.5 206.5 210.7 218.1 225.7 229.1 233.6 241.8 250.3 254.1 DCS Tone Codes — 104 codes total This page applies to the following scanners: BCD396XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20...ents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCD396XTSpecs.html (8 of 8)5/26/2009 11:13:09 AM...
Page 250 The Complete Reference This document provides a complete reference to all menus, functions, and features of the BCD396XT Digital Trunk Tracker Scanner from Uniden. It is based on the Operation Specification that is used both as a guide to the software engineers for creating the scanner’s user interface and as a...
Page 251: Table Of Contents
Contents Feature Summary ......................8 Band Coverage ......................8 Channels ........................9 Memory Architecture ..................... 9 Channel Memory Scan ....................9 Priority Scan ........................9 Priority Plus Scan ......................9 Search with Scan ......................9 Scan Speed ........................9 Scanning Lockout ......................10 Temporary Lockout .......................
Page 252 IF Exchange ........................12 Dropout Delay ....................... 13 Weather and SAME Alert ....................13 ® Close Call Frequency Capture ..................13 Close Call Temporary Store ..................13 Tone-Out Sequential Decode ..................13 Location-Based Scanning* ................... 13 Location Alert System* ....................13 Navigation Modes* ......................
Page 253 Alert for Point Of Interest ..................24 Alert for Dangerous Xing ..................24 Alert for Dangerous Road ..................24 Battery Low Tone ......................24 Operation ........................... 25 Power On ........................25 Volume and Squelch Control ..................26 Volume Adjust Mode ....................26 Squelch Adjust Mode ....................
Page 254 Quick Save for CTCSS/DCS/P25 NAC Data ............128 Key Operation During Scan ..................129 SCAN HOLD MODE ..................... 131 Display while in Scan Hold Mode ................131 General Operation....................131 Hold on Conventional System ................. 135 Hold on Trunked System ..................135 Hold on TalkGroup ID from ID Search / ID Scan .............
Page 255 Close Call Auto Store ....................161 CC Hit with Scan ...................... 162 Direct Entry / Quick Save / Go to Quick Search Hold Mode ........162 Key Operation During Close Call Only Mode ............163 Key Operation During Close Call Hold Mode ............164 WEATHER SCAN MODE .....................
Page 256 Error State ........................ 197 Key Operation During Clone Mode ................197 KEYLOCK ........................198 KEY SAFE MODE ......................199 Changed Key Operation in Key Safe Mode ............. 199 Key Safe Operation ....................200 Key Safe Message ....................200 MEMORY INITIALIZATION ..................201 BATTERY CHARGE .....................
Page 257: Feature Summary
Feature Summary Band Coverage Frequency (MHz) Modulation Step (kHz) Remark Lower Edge Upper Edge 25.0000 26.9600 Petroleum Products & Broadcast Pickup 26.9650 27.4050 CB Class D Channel 27.4100 27.9950 Business & Forest Products 28.0000 29.6800 20.0 10 Meter Amateur Band 29.7000 49.9900 10.0...
Page 258: Channels
Channels Dynamic – You can create up to 25,000 total conventional channels, trunked channels, and trunked system frequencies.  Channels in a conventional system contain a frequency.  Channels in a trunked system contain a talk group ID (TGID). Memory Architecture Absolute Limits: Systems Sites Total...
Page 259: Scanning Lockout
Scanning Lockout You can lock out any System, Site, Channel Group, Channel, or search frequency. Locked out channels are skipped (or ignored) during scanning. If a system, site, or channel group is locked, all channels belonging to it will be skipped during scanning. Temporary Lockout Sites, Systems, Channels, or Frequencies temporarily locked out are automatically unlocked when power is cycled.
Page 260: Multi-Site System
Multi-Site System All trunked systems can have more than one site. All sites in the system share the same Channel Groups and Channels. Control Channel Only Trunk Tracking can be achieved by entering only the control channels for Motorola and P25 systems. P25 One-Frequency Trunking The scanner can follow individual talk groups on P25 single-frequency systems that use both NAC and TGID’s for squelch control and user identification.
Page 261: Search Lockout
Search Lockout You can lock out up to 500 frequencies.  The limit of temporary L/O frequencies: 250  The limit of permanent L/O frequencies: 250  Locked out frequencies will be skipped in Search Mode or Close Call Mode. ...
Page 262: Dropout Delay
Dropout Delay Controls whether the scanner pauses at the end of a transmission to wait for a reply. You can set the Delay time for each System. All Channels in the System share the same delay setting. You can also set the Delay time for Search, Close Call and Tone-Out. You can set the minus delay time.
Page 263: Pc Control
PC Control You can download information into the scanner and control the scanner via your personal computer. LCD and Keypad Backlight You can select your desired LCD backlight color from White, Red, Magenta, Blue, Green, Cyan, or Yellow. The Keypad backlight is single white. The backlight can be adjusted to 3 different brightness levels Alert Tone Level This feature lets you adjust the volume level of the following tones: Key Beep, Emergency Alert, Channel...
Page 264: Design
Design The below is a design reference. There might be some differences between this image and the actual final design. Thursday, May 14, 2009...
Page 265: Controls And Keys
Controls and Keys “Long press” means pressing a key more than 2 second. Each key has a “normal” mode and a “Function” mode. Normal Mode: Normal Mode means that the scanner is not in Function Mode. In this mode, the icon is not displayed.
Page 266 Function + Scan / srch Key  Press to resume searching. (Search Hold Mode and while monitoring in Search Mode)  Press to toggle between ID SCAN and ID SEARCH while scanning a trunked system.  Press to display the Quick Search Prompt. (Except in Search Mode, Search Hold Mode, GPS Mode and Band Scope Mode) ...
Page 267 Function + L/O Key  Press once to temporarily lock out the current system, current site or current search range in Scan Mode and Scan Hold Mode. This lock out is cleared when power is turned off then back on. ...
Page 268 Function + 6 / RIGHT / disp Key  Press to change the Display Mode. (Scan Hold Mode and Custom Search Mode) (Display mode 1 -> Display mode 2 -> Display mode 3 -> Display mode 1 ->….)  Press to change the GPS Display. (GPS Mode) Function + 7 / att (Attenuator) Key ...
Page 269 Menu Key  Press to enter the Menu Mode.  Press to go back up one menu level when in the Menu Mode.  Press after entering the value to indicate going to a number tagged system or channel. Function + Menu Key ...
Page 270: Displays
Displays LCD Design The reference design shown below is for illustration purposes only and is not intended to be a photorealistic representation of the display. HOLD L/O PRI ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOP abcdefghi jklmnop S0: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 GRP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Icons Sx: :...
Page 271: Dot Matrix
LNK: This icon appears when data is received on a VOICE CHANNEL. This shows in the same place as "P25". DAT: This icon appears when data on CONTROL CHANNEL is received. This shows in the same place as "P25" icon. ENC: This icon appears when encrypted APCO P25 digitized voice is received.
Page 272: Tones
Tones The scanner can produce 3 fundamental tones, high (1200 Hz), middle (920 Hz), and low (640 Hz). Furthermore, there are Alert Tones and Weather Alert Sirens which include other sounds. Additionally, special alert tones (Location Alert, CC alert, Emergency alert and WX alert, etc) can be set to custom volume levels.
Page 273: Tones In Menu Mode
Tones in Menu Mode Selecting a menu item As you step to the next menu item by turning [Scroll Control] knob, the scanner will sound a single high beep for 100 ms. However, if the menu item is the last item and you turn [Scroll Control] knob in the clockwise direction, the scanner will sound a double high beep (75 ms beep - 25 ms silent - 75 ms beep).
Page 274: Operation
Operation NOTE: Valid keys for the "Press Any Key" prompt are all keys except for [ ]. Pressing [ ] always turns on or off the backlight. And specially, pressing [L/O] cancels the prompt and exit from any Menu and so on immediately. Power On Press [ ] for 1 second to turn on the scanner.
Page 275: Volume And Squelch Control
Volume and Squelch Control Volume and Squelch can be adjusted by rotating the [Scroll Control] in the following modes: Scan Mode, Scan Hold Mode, Search Mode, Search Hold Mode, Tone-Out Mode, Weather Scan Mode, Close Call Only Mode, Band Scope Mode, Band Scope Hold Mode. Volume Adjust Mode To adjust the volume level, press [Scroll Control].
Page 276: P25 Condition Mode
P25 Condition Mode Press [Function] + [Scroll Control] key to go to P25 Condition mode in Volume / Squelch Adjust mode. You can see the current status of APCO decoding and the threshold values in this mode. 3. 87 Battery Voltage System 1 25.
Page 277: Menu Mode
Menu Mode General Operations Key Operation To enter the Menu Mode: Press [Menu] To select a Menu item: Turn [Scroll Control] To select a Menu item or input data: Press [E / yes / gps] or tap the [Scroll Control] To Return to the previous: Press [Menu] To exit from Menu Mode: ...
Page 278 Edit Name The editing cursor is displayed. Turn [Scroll Control] to choose the character and the cursor stays at the highlighted position. The display is the following. Edi t Name System 1 4 ← cursor → 6 Press [4 / LEFT / ifx] to move the cursor to the left and [6 / RIGHT / disp] to move it to the right. Press [.
Page 279 Edit Frequency and Set Tone The editing cursor is displayed. Press a number key to enter each digit and press the decimal key to input a decimal point. The cursor moves to the left or the right by turning [Scroll Control] knob. If you press the decimal key when a decimal point is already entered, the frequency data is cleared and the editing cursor moves to the first position.
Page 280: Error Messages
Hexadecimal TGID edit Turn the [Scroll Control] to select Hexadecimal characters from “0” to “F”, Press [4 / LEFT / ifx] to move the cursor left or press [6 / RIGHT / disp] to move cursor right. Press [E / yes / gps] to set the Hex ID. Note: You can change the TGID format in Set ID Format (DEC/HEX) If you press the decimal key when there are already an acceptable number of hyphens, the TGID is cleared and the editing cursor moves to the first position.
Page 281: Top Menu
Top Menu Press [MENU] key to go to Menu Mode. Top Menu has the following items. Program System Program Location Srch/CloCall Opt Search for... Close Call Priority ID Scan WX Operation Tone-Out for … Wired Clone Settings Turn the [Scroll Control] to select items and press [E / yes / gps] to go to the selected item. Press [Menu] to exit from Menu Mode.
Page 282 Creating a New System You can create up to 500 systems. To create a new system, select the system type from the following items. Select for P25 Standard Trunk or One-Freq system Select for any Motorola Type system EDCS Select for EDACS WIDE/NARROW or EDACS SCAT system Select for an LTR system Conventional Select for a non-trunked system.
Page 283 System Settings This menu has the following items. Edit Name Edit Sys Option Edit Site Edit Group Copy System Delete System These setting items are different for each System Type. See System Settings for details of the differences. The first line displays the System name. For example, the following figure shows it is in settings of the System named "System 1 C".
Page 284 Edit Sys Option You can change the following System settings. Set Quick Key Set Startup Key Set Number Tag Set Lockout Set Hold Time ID Scan/Search Set Delay Time Edit Fleet Map Priority ID Scan Set Status Bit Set End Code Emergency Alert Set ID Format (DEC/HEX) Set ID Format (AFS/DEC)
Page 285 Set Number Tag The System Number Tag can be set in this menu. Press a number key to input the number tag. Press [. / no / pri] to clear the input. Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the setting and return to the previous menu. Note: The valid setting range is from 0 to 999.
Page 286 Set Delay Time This setting controls how long the scanner stays on a transmission before resuming scanning. If you select a positive value, the scanner will hold on the channel for that duration after the carrier drops before resuming scanning. If you select a negative value, the scanner will stay on a transmission until the carrier drops or until the selected time elapses, whichever is shortest.
Page 287 Custom On the other hand, if "Custom" is selected, then you are prompted to enter the Fleet Map information. You need to set Size Codes to all Blocks in order. There are 8 Blocks from "Block 0" to "Block 7" and 15 Size Codes from "Size Code 0" to "Size Code 14". In this selection, first Line displays the Block number and after second lines displays the Size Code.
Page 288 Set End Code This setting determines how the scanner treats the transmission end code. Analog The scanner pays attention to the analog transmission end code. Analog+Digital The scanner pays attention to both analog and digital transmission end code Ignore The scanner ignores the transmission end code and waits for carrier drop. Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the selection and return to the previous menu.
Page 289 Set Alert Light If “Set Alert Light” is selected, you can select from the following alert colors: Blue Magenta Green Cyan Yellow White If you select “Off”, the scanner returns to the previous menu. If you select an alert light color, the scanner goes to the Alert Light Pattern selection. The alert light is set to on Slow Blink The alert light blinks slowly...
Page 290 Rvw ID:Srch L/O Allows you to review TGIDs that are locked out in ID Search or ID Scan. Any TalkGroup in this list will be skipped if encountered in ID Search or ID Scan. This option displays “temporarily L/O IDs” and “permanently L/O IDs” without distinction. The first Line displays "Unlock?(Y/N)"...
Page 291 Clr All L/O IDs Selecting this causes the scanner to prompt "Confirm ?" and "Unlock All(Y/N)". Confi rm? Unlock All(Y/N) Press [E / yes / gps] to unlock all TGIDs. Press [. / no / pri] to cancel this selection. The scanner returns to the previous menu.
Page 292 P25 Waiting Time The feature is used to set a wait time for P25 decode. After receive a transmission the scanner will wait for the set duration to check if there is any P25 signal. Selectable waiting times are: 0 ms 100 ms 200 ms 300 ms...
Page 293 Copy System You can copy the System and all associated settings by select this menu item. The scanner prompts you for a new System Name. New Sys Name? 4 ← cursor → 6 Press [E / yes / gps] to copy the System with the entered System name.The scanner goes to the System Settings menu with the new System active.
Page 294: Program Site
Program Site You can select an existing Site for editing or create a new Site. Site Names that already have been created are displayed as Menu Items. Sites are sorted in the order of the Site Quick Key (See: Set Quick Key) as 1, 2,…,0,11,…99, 90 and not assigned.
Page 295 Edit Name You can name the site. Refer to FONT DATA for the characters that can be entered. Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the name entered. The scanner returns to the previous menu. Set Quick Key This option lets you select which Quick Key will rapidly lock/unlock the site in Scan Mode. Turn [Scroll Control] to select the Site Quick Key.
Page 296 If you enter less than “125Hz”, the scanner prompts “Out of Range" and "Set Min? (Y/N)”. Press [E / yes / gps] to set the minimum spacing frequency (125Hz). Or, press [. / no / pri] to return to editing state. If you enter over “128.0kHz”, the scanner prompts "Out of Range"...
Page 297 When you select ”Set Spacing”, the following spacing values can be selected: 5.00 kHz 6.25 kHz 10.00 kHz 12.50 kHz 15.00 kHz 18.75 kHz 20.00 kHz 25.00 kHz 30.00 kHz 31.25 kHz 35.00 kHz 37.50 kHz 40.00 kHz 43.75 kHz 45.00 kHz 50.00 kHz 55.00 kHz...
Page 298 If "New Frequency" is selected by pressing [E / yes / gps], the scanner skips the next selection. Then it goes to Edit Frequency menu automatically to enter the frequency. If you select a stored frequency and press [E / yes / gps], the scanner prompts for the next setting items. Edit Frequency Set Number Tag* Set Lockout...
Page 299 Set Number Tag The channel Number Tag can be set in this menu. Press a number key to input the number tag. Press [. / no / pri] to clear the input. Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the setting and return to the previous menu. Note: The valid setting range is from 0 to 999.
Page 300 Set Modulation You can select the modulation from following settings. Auto* The scanner uses the modulation normal for the frequency’s band. The scanner uses Narrowband FM demodulation. The scanner uses FM demodulation. Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the entry and return to the previous menu. *If the system type is “MOT”,”LT”...
Page 301 Set LocationInfo You can set the location data for the current site. The setting items are: Set Latitude Set Longitude Set Range Set GPS Enable Turn [Scroll Control] to select the item and Press [E / yes / gps] to go to the settings. Set Latitude Press the number keys to enter latitude data.
Page 302 Set Longitude Press the number keys to enter longitude data. Press any number key when the cursor is in the last position to toggle between east longitude (E) and west longitude (W). Press [E / yes / gps] to accept and return to the previous menu. If “DMS:DDD⁰MM’SS.ss”...
Page 303 P25 Waiting Time The feature is used to set a wait time for P25 decode. After receive a transmission the scanner will wait for the set duration to check if there is any P25 signal. Selectable waiting times are: 0 ms 100 ms 200 ms 300 ms...
Page 304: Program Group
Program Group This menu lets you select a Channel Group for programming or create a new Channel Group. Names of Groups already created are displayed as Menu Items. The order of Groups is sorted by setting of Quick Key for Groups (See: Set Quick Key ) as 1, 2, 3, ... , 9, 0 and “.” (=Not assigned). The order of Groups belonging to same Quick Key is determined by the assigned order.
Page 305 Set Quick Key This option lets you select which Group Quick Key will rapidly enable/disable the Group when the scanner is in the scanning mode. Allowed settings are from 0 to 9 and not assigned. You can assign more than one Channel Group to the same Quick Key.
Page 306 If “DEG:DDD.dddddd” is selected in Set Pos Format, the display is the following. Set Lati tude 00. 000000 Set Longitude Enter the longitude data using the number keys. Press any number key when the cursor is in the last position to toggle between west longitude (W) and east longitude (E).
Page 307 Set GPS Enable When this option is set to “On”, the scanner will control the L/O status of this channel group using position information supplied from a connected GPS. The Channel Group’s L/O state is automatically controlled by position information. The Channel Group’s L/O state is not influenced by GPS.
Page 308: Program Channel
Program Channel You can select a Channel for programming or add a new Channel. Names of Channels already added are displayed as Menu Items. The order of Channels is sorted by created or pasted order. "New Channel" is displayed as the next to last Channel. "Paste Channel" will be displayed as the last item if a Channel has previously been copied from a compatible (same typed) System / Site.
Page 309 Input TGID: You must enter a TGID. You can input only a TGID in the format suitable for the site type. Motorola Type ID (Decimal Format ID) : When the custom Fleet Map setting for a MOT system is not all Size Code 0 for Blocks, the scanner treats the System as a Motorola Type I.
Page 310 EDACS ID : For EDCS Wide/Narrow systems. Press the number keys to enter the Agency number. Press the decimal key to enter a hyphen. Press the number keys to enter the Fleet number and SubFleet number. Note: Agency number (00 - 15), hyphen, Fleet number (00 - 15) and SubFleet number (0 - 7) The scanner does not accept all zero ID ("00-000").
Page 311 Channel Settings The following settings are available for channels. Edit Name Edit Frequency Edit TGID Set Audio Type Set Number Tag Set Modulation Set Attenuator Set Priority Set Alert Set Lockout Volume Offset Copy Channel Delete Channel New Channel The specific settings available depend on the current system type. See Channel Settings for details of the differences.
Page 312 Set Audio Type You can select an audio type for each channel. The scanner receives both Digital and Analog signals. Digital Only The scanner receives only Digital signals. Analog Only The scanner receives only Analog signals. If you select “All”, the scanner returns to previous menu. If you select “Digital Only”...
Page 313 If you select “Set Lockout”: You can select a CTCSS or DCS for lockout. Turn [Scroll Control] to select and press [E / yes / gps] key to lock it out. Then the scanner returns to the previous menu. Set Number Tag The Channel Number Tag can be set in this menu.
Page 314 Set Alert Channel alert options can be set using this menu. Set Alert Tone Set Alert Light Press [E / yes / gps] to enter the setting. Set Alert Tone You can select whether the scanner should sound an Alert Tone when this Channel becomes active*. No alert sounds.
Page 315 Set Lockout This option allows you to lock or unlock the current system. When the system is locked out, the scanner does not check it. Unlocked The system is unlocked. Temporary L/O The system is temporarily locked out. Lockout The system is locked out. Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the selection and return to the previous menu.
Page 316: Program Location
Program Location You can select the any Location for programming or create a new Location. First, select the location type to edit or create from the following types: Dangerous Xing Dangerous Road Select an existing location or New Location. For a POI, it goes to POI Settings. For a “Dangerous Xing” or “Dangerous Road”, it goes to Dangerous Xing / Road Settings.
Page 317 Set Type This option can be used to select the location type. Dangerous Xing Dangerous Road Turn [Scroll Control] to select the type and press [E / yes / gps] to accept it. Then the scanner returns to the previous menu. Set Alert Set Alert Tone You can select whether the scanner should sound an Alert Tone when approaching the set Location.
Page 318 Set Alert Volume This option can be used to set the alert level. Auto The alert is set to the same volume as normal audio. Level1-15 The alert is fixed to the selected audio level. No alert sounds. Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the data and return to the previous menu. Note: This setting menu appears in “Dangerous Xing”...
Page 319 Set Range This option sets the range for a POI. In this menu, the setting unit depends on the setting in Set Unit. When you select “mile” in Set Unit the displayed unit will be miles. When you select “km” in Set Unit the displayed unit will be kms. The valid setting range is from 0.05 to 4.0, by 0.05 steps.
Page 320 Set Lockout This option allows you to lock or unlock the current system. When the system is locked out, the scanner does not check it. Unlocked The system is unlocked. Temporary L/O The system is temporarily locked out. Lockout The system is locked out. Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the selection and return to the previous menu.
Page 321: Srch/Clocall Opt
Srch/CloCall Opt This menu includes the following: Freq Lockouts Broadcast Screen Tone/Code Search Repeater Find Max Auto Store Set Delay Time Set Attenuator Set Audio AGC P25 Waiting Time Press [E / yes / gps] to go to each setting. Each setting in these options is applied to some or all Search Modes*.
Page 322 Freq Lockouts You can select from these items. Unlock All Rvw Search L/O Press [E / yes / gps] to enter each menu. Unlock All Selecting this causes the scanner to prompt "Confirm?" and "Unlock All(Y/N)". Press [E / yes / gps] to unlock all frequencies. Then the scanner returns to Freq Lockouts. Press [.
Page 323 Broadcast Screen This option sets whether the scanner screens broadcast frequencies. You can select the following items. Set All Band On Set All Band Off Set Each Band Program Band Press [E / yes / gps] to enter each menu. Set All Band On This function can turn all bands On.
Page 324 Program Band You can set up to 10 custom band screens. Select a band and press [E / yes / gps] to go to the limit setting. You need to set a lower and upper limit frequency. First, enter the lower limit frequency and store it by pressing [E / yes / gps].
Page 325 Max Auto Store This setting controls how many hits the scanner will automatically store in either Search and Store or Close Call Auto Store. When the scanner has saved the maximum number of hits set by this setting, it stops storing. When there are already more auto-stored Channels than the number of Max Auto Store, the scanner will not perform Auto Store operation.
Page 326 Set Audio AGC When Audio AGC function is “On”, the scanner judges the volume level and changes the volume automatically. You can turn either Analog or Digital audio “On” or “Off”. Analog : On / Off Digital : On / Off Audio AGC is on.
Page 327: Search For
Search for... This menu includes the following items. Service Search Edit Service Custom Search Edit Custom Search and Store Set Search Key Press [E / yes / gps] to enter each item. Service Search You can select from 12 preset search bands for searching. Public Safety News Ham Radio...
Page 328 Set Delay Time This setting controls how long the scanner stays on frequencies after a transmission ends before resuming searching. Turn [Scroll Control] to select the delay time setting from the following list: -10 sec -5 sec -2 sec 0 sec 1 sec 2 sec 5 sec...
Page 329 P25 Waiting Time The feature is used to set a wait time for P25 decode. After receive a transmission the scanner will wait for the set duration to check if there is any P25 signal. Selectable waiting times are: 0 ms 100 ms 200 ms 300 ms...
Page 330 Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the setting and return to the previous menu. Note: The valid setting range is from 0 to 999. Blank means a number tag not assigned. Set Lockout This option allows you to lock or unlock the current system. When the system is locked out, the scanner does not check it.
Page 331 Edit Custom You can edit the 10 Custom Search Ranges. Names of Custom Search Ranges are displayed as Menu items. For example, if all names are not changed from default name, selectable items are as follows: Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 10 Select the Name and press [E / yes / gps] to go to Menu of editing Custom settings.
Page 332 Set Delay Time This setting controls how long the scanner stays on frequencies after a transmission ends before resuming searching. Turn [Scroll Control] to select the delay time setting from the following list: -10 sec -5 sec -2 sec 0 sec 1 sec 2 sec 5 sec...
Page 333 Set C-Ch Only These options let you set whether the scanner tracks talk group activity when it detects a Motorola or LTR control channel. This section has the following menus: C-Ch Only Mode Set MOT BandPlan C-Ch Only Mode You can select how the scanner tracks Motorola System and LTR System. (C-Ch means Control Channel.) The scanner only searches for Motorola and LTR Control Channels.
Page 334 P25 Waiting Time The feature is used to set a wait time for P25 decode. After receive a transmission the scanner will wait for the set duration to check if there is any P25 signal. Selectable waiting times are: 0 ms 100 ms 200 ms 300 ms...
Page 335 Search and Store This function lets the scanner search for new frequencies in Custom Search Ranges or Service Search Ranges, or new TGID's on a trunked System. First, select a System to store the found Channels into. The scanner displays all created Systems. Turn [Scroll Control] to select the System.
Page 336 For Trunked System If a trunked System is selected, you will be asked to select a site. If no site is stored in that system, message “No Site Stored Press Any Key” will be displayed and the scanner will sound an error tone. After the site is selected, the scanner begins searching that System.
Page 337 If the Memory is full, it displays "Memory Full" on the second line and sounds an Error Tone. It does not exit from Search and Store Mode automatically. During "Search and Store" operation or in one of the above-mentioned End State, only the following operations are valid.
Page 338: Close Call
Close Call This menu has the following items. Close Call Only CC Auto Store Hits with Scan Set CC Mode Set CC Override Set CC Alert Set CC Bands Note: "CC" means "Close Call". Press [E / yes / gps] to enter the menu. Close Call Only When this item is selected at Close Call, the scanner exits from the Menu Mode and goes to the Close Call Only Mode.
Page 339 Set Number Tag Number Tag can be set in this menu. Press a number key to input the number tag. Press [. / no / pri] to clear the input. Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the setting and return to the previous menu. Note: The valid setting range is from 0 to 999.
Page 340 Set CC Override This mode determines how the scanner will behave when a Close Call signal is detected. The scanner alerts (depending on the CC Alert setting) and displays "CC Found!” then immediately jumps to the Close Call frequency. The scanner alerts (depending on the CC Alert setting) and displays "CC Found!" and "Press FUNC Key"...
Page 341 Set Alert Light You can set whether the scanner should have an alert light when it gets a Close Call hit. Blue Magenta Green Cyan Yellow White If you select “Off”, the scanner returns to the previous menu. If you select an alert light color, the scanner goes to the Alert Light Pattern selection. The alert light is set to on Slow Blink The alert light blinks slowly...
Page 342 Set CC Bands This setting controls the band filtering used during Close Call operation. You can turn on or off the following bands. VHF Low 1 On/Off 25.0000 - 53.9800 MHz VHF Low 2 On/Off 54.0000 - 107.9000 MHz Air Band On/Off 108.0000 - 136.9916 MHz...
Page 343: Priority Scan
Priority Scan You can set following items in this menu. Set Priority Set Interval MaxCHs/Pri-Scan Press [E / yes / gps] to enter each setting. Set Priority This setting controls how the scanner treats Priority Channels. You can select the following items. The scanner provides no special treatment for Priority Channels.
Page 344: Wx Operation
WX Operation This menu lets you set the following items. Weather Scan Weather Alert Program SAME Set Delay Time Set Attenuator Set Audio AGC WX Alt Priority Select "Weather Scan" and press [E / yes / gps] to start Weather Scan. Select any other and press [E / yes / gps] to enter each setting.
Page 345 Program SAME You can edit the 5 SAME Groups. The names of SAME Groups are displayed as Menu Items. Default names as follows. SAME 1 SAME 2 SAME 3 SAME 4 SAME 5 Select the Name and press [E / yes / gps] to go to Same Group Editing Menu. SAME Group Settings You can set the following items.
Page 346 Set Delay Time This setting controls how long the scanner stays on the Weather Channel after a transmission ends before resuming. Turn [Scroll Control] to select the delay time setting from the following list: -10 sec -5 sec -2 sec 0 sec 1 sec 2 sec...
Page 347: Tone-Out For
Tone-Out for … This menu lets you set the following items. Tone-Out Standby Tone-Out Setup Select “Tone-Out Standby” to start monitoring the Tone-out Frequency. Select “Tone-Out Setup” to go to Tone-Out Setup. Tone-Out Standby When this item is selected at Tone-Out for …, the scanner exits from Menu Mode and goes to Tone-Out standby Mode.
Page 348 Set Frequency You can set the following items. Edit Frequency Set Modulation Set Attenuator Press [E / yes / gps] to go to each setting. Edit Frequency If you select to edit the frequency, the scanner displays the current frequency in edit mode. Press the number keys and [.
Page 349 Set Delay Time This setting controls how long the scanner stays on Mute Off state after a transmission ends. Turn [Scroll Control] to select setting value from: 0 sec 1 sec 2 sec 5 sec 10 sec 30 sec Infinite Then press [E / yes / gps] to accept and return to the previous menu.
Page 350 Set Alert Light You can select whether the scanner should have alert light when a tone-out Channel becomes active*. Blue Magenta Green Cyan Yellow White If you select “Off”, the scanner returns to the previous menu. If you select an alert light color, the scanner goes to the Alert Light Pattern selection. The alert light is set to on Slow Blink The alert light blinks slowly...
Page 351: Wired Clone
Wired Clone Connect two BCD396XTs and select this menu to copy and override all data from one to another. Master Slave The scanner you set to Master’s data will be copied to the scanner you set to Slave. Then go to Wired Clone Mode.
Page 352: Settings
Settings You can set the following items from this menu. Set Backlight Adjust Key Beep Battery Option Adjust Audio AGC Adjust Contrast Set C-CH Output Set GPS Format Set Serial Port Band Defaults P25 LP Filter See Scanner Info Press [E / yes / gps] to enter each setting. Set Backlight This menu has the following items.
Page 353 Set Color This option can be used to select the backlight color. Blue Magenta Green Cyan Yellow White Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the data and return to the previous menu. Adjust Key Beep Adjusts the beep tone volume level. Auto Key Beep is set to the same volume as normal audio.
Page 354 Adjust Audio AGC You can set the following items. Analog AGC Digital AGC Press [E / yes / gps] to enter each setting. Analog AGC You can set the following items in this menu. Response Time Reference Gain Gain Range Press [E / yes / gps] to enter each setting.
Page 355 Digital AGC This menu lets you set the following items. Response Time Reference Gain In this menu, you can set the Reference Gain for Digital AGC. Selectable values are from –5 to +5, by steps of 1. Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the selection and return to the previous menu. Press [E / yes / gps] to enter each setting.
Page 356 Set GPS Format You can set the following items for GPS. Set Pos Format Set Time Format Set Time Zone Set Unit Press [E / yes / gps] to go to each setting menu. Set Pos Format The option sets the position format for latitude and longitude. DMS:DDD⁰MM’SS.ss DEG:DDD.dddddd Note: This setting changes all Location Input displays and the GPS Mode display.
Page 357 Set Serial Port You can set the serial port speed from the following items. 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the selection and return to the previous menu. Band Defaults This menu lets you set the default modulation and default step for each band.
Page 358 Turn [Scroll Control] to focus the cursor on the band you want to change. Then, press [E / yes / gps] to enter the modulation setting menu. The following modulation setting values will be shown. set the current band as AM modulation set the current band as NFM modulation set the current band as FM modulation set the current band as WFM modulation...
Page 359 See Scanner Info This menu lets you see some information about the scanner, including the memory usage. Select from the following items. % Memory Used Firmware Version Press [E / yes / gps] to go to each setting. % Memory Used When you select this option, the scanner displays the percent of memory that is used, the number and percent of systems, sites and channels that are created.
Page 360: Display During Scan Mode
SCAN MODE Display during Scan Mode The LCD display in Scan mode is as follows. The first line shows the system, site or search range name while scanning. System 1 SCAN ↑ This shows the scanning direction. S0: 1 2 3 4 * 6 7 8 9 0 These show the one’s place of Quick Key for system or site.
Page 361 While in the Scan Mode, the first line displays currently scanned system, site or search range name and the second line displays "SCAN" (for conventional System) or "ID SCAN", "ID SEARCH" (for trunked System) scrolling from the right to the left, or a search frequency. Disabled Quick Keys are displayed as “*”. The Quick Key for the Current System blinks.
Page 362: Scanning Order
Scanning Order First, systems belonging to Quick Key 1 are scanned. Then systems that belong to Quick Key 2,…,9,0,11,…19,10,21,……,99,90 are scanned in order. Systems with no Quick Key are scanned last. When the scanning of all systems ends, the scanner starts Service Search for any unlocked/enabled searches.
Page 363: Scanning Operation
Scanning Operation Quick Key Operation For Conventional Systems, the SQK is set at the system level. However, for trunked systems, the SQK is set at the site level instead of the system level. In the display, enabled SQKs show their number; disabled SQKs show “*”; SQKs with no system assigned show "-".
Page 364 Scan for Conventional Systems In conventional scanning, the scanner steps through each unlocked channel. If there is activity on the channel, the scanner monitors activity until the transmission ends. While monitoring the transmission, the first line alternates between the current system name and current group name every 1 second.
Page 365 ID Scan : If a TGID matches a TGID stored in an unlocked channel, the scanner goes to the V-Ch and monitors the transmission until it ends. While monitoring a TGID already stored into the Memory, the first line of the display alternates between the current site name and current channel group name every 1 second, and second line displays the current channel name.
Page 366 ID Display Format The scanner displays received ID in the following format on the second line. Normal ID The scanner displays as "ID:xxxx" for no-named TGID. Example) MOT Type I ID ID:101-1 MOT Type II ID:12345 (Decimal Format) ID:123 h (Hexadecimal Format) P25 ID ID:12345...
Page 367 PATCH ID The scanner displays a PATCH list IDs and received PATCH ID as "ID:xx-xxx yy-yyy". (xx-xxx : One of the PATCH list IDs, yy-yyy: received PATCH ID) Example) EDACS PATCH ID: ID:01-012 00-002 MOT Type II: ID:42000 42016 *If the first PATCH list ID is already named, the scanner only displays that ID’s name. PARTIAL ID The scanner displays the wild card portion of a PARTIAL ID as "-"...
Page 368 Trunking Activity Indicators (Display Mode 3) The scanner shows trunking activity when held on the C-Ch. Press [6 / RIGHT / disp] in Function Mode to change the Display Mode in Scan Hold Mode. (See SCAN HOLD MODE.) In EDACS and LTR systems, the order of indicators is the order of LCN. In Motorola systems, it is the order of the frequency programming.
Page 369 Location Based Scanning This operation controls the lockout state for each group or site when the scanner is connected to a GPS unit. This works automatically based on the location data from GPS when the feature is set to “On” in Set GPS Enable.
Page 370 Control Channel Data Stream Output The scanner can output the data stream on the control channel. You can turn on this feature in the menu Set C-CH Output. When it is active, the scanner will output the data stream whenever it is receiving a control channel.
Page 371 [LTR System] LTR,<A>-<GG>-<HH>-<III>-<FF> <A> = Area Number (0 or 1) <GG> = Goto Repeater Number (Hex 2 digits, 5 bits) <HH> = Home Repeater Number (Hex 2 digits, 5 bits) <III> = ID Number (Hex 2 digits, 8 bits) <FF> = Free Repeater Number (Hex 2 digits, 5 bits) For example: LTR,0-01-01-FA-02 [P25]...
Page 372 For Motorola system: Decoded Description Remark ,CNM TG-tttt CH-ccc VC-ffffffff Call for Talk Group tttt = Talk Group ID (Hex 4 digits, 16 bits) ccc = LCN (Hex 3 digits, 10 bits) ffffffff = Frequency (BCD 8 digits) ,CIP TG-tttt CH-ccc VC-ffffffff Call for ICALL tttt = Talk Group ID (Hex 4 digits, 16 bits) ccc = LCN (Hex 3 digits, 10 bits)
Page 373 For EDACS system: Decoded Description Remark ,CNM TG-ttt CH-cc VC-ffffffff Call for Talk Group ttt = Talk Group ID (Hex 3 digits, 11 bits) cc = LCN (Hex 2 digits, 5 bits) ffffffff = frequency (BCD 8 digits) ,CIP TG-tttt CH-cc VC-ffffffff Call for ICALL tttt = Unit ID (Hex 4 digits, 14 bits) cc = LCN (Hex 2 digits, 5 bits)
Page 374 For P25 system: Decoded Description Remark ,IU N-n B-bbbbbbbb S-sss Identifier Update n = Identifier Number bbbbbbbb = Base Frequency (Hex 8 digits, 32 bits) sss = Spacing (Hex 3 digits, 10 bits) ,IUVU N-n B-bbbbbbbb S-sss Identifier Update for VHF/UHF n = Identifier Number bbbbbbbb = Base Frequency (Hex 8 digits, 32 bits) sss = Spacing (Hex 3 digits, 10 bits)
Page 375: Temporary System Hold
Temporary System Hold *For trunked systems, “system” should be read as “site” in this section. **In Temporary System Hold state, Priority Scan and Close Call function are not performed. The scanner scans only one system while displaying icon by pressing [FUNC] Key. This state is called "Temporary System Hold".
Page 376: System Hold
System Hold Long press [Hold / ] to goes to the System Hold Mode. While on System Hold, the scanner scans only one system and the scanner flashes the HOLD icon. HOLD System 1 Scan ↑ S0: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 GRP 1 2 3 - - - 7 - - - Long press [Hold / ] key to resume full system scan, and other keys will work normally.
Page 377: Quick Save For Ctcss/Dcs/P25 Nac Data
System Select in Scan Hold Mode When you go to Quick Select System from Scan Hold Mode and exit from this state, the scanner holds on the first channel of the selected system. If you select a locked out system, the locked state for the selected system is not changed. Quick Save for CTCSS/DCS/P25 NAC Data When CTCSS/DCS search or P25 NAC search is set for a conventional channel and the scanner is detecting a CTCSS/DCS tone data or P25 NAC data, you can store the tone data into the current channel by pressing [E...
Page 378: Key Operation During Scan
Key Operation During Scan Normal Mode [Scroll Control] knob Turn this knob to resume scanning while monitoring. Turn this knob to change the scan direction. If the scanner is scanning system scan, service search, then custom search turn this knob counterclockwise to scan custom search, service search, then system scan. [Scan / srch] key Press this key to resume scanning while monitoring.
Page 379 F+[Scan / srch] key If the current system is a conventional system or search range: ・ Press this key to display the prompt for starting Quick Search. ・ Press [E / yes / gps] to start Quick Search. ・ Press [. / no / pri] to go to Search for..・...
Page 380: Scan Hold Mode
SCAN HOLD MODE Press [Hold / ] in Scan Mode to go to Scan Hold Mode. Display while in Scan Hold Mode The display in Scan Hold mode is as follows. HOLD System 1 This shows a channel name or a frequency. Channel A C67.
Page 381 Press [FUNC] to go to the Function Mode and display the system number tag, channel number tag, IF Exchange and Volume level. HOLD T001. 001 Channel number tag Group 1 Channel A System number tag I FX V - 3 Volume level S0: 1 - - - - - - - - - GRP - - - 4 - - - - - -...
Page 382 Hold on a Channel (TGID) in Trunked System: *If there are two or more sites in the system, the same TGIDs will appear in every site. The scanner checks the current site for the selected TGID. When you hold on a channel in a trunked system and a C-Ch exists, the scanner displays as follows. If the TGID you are holding on is stored into the system, first line alternately displays the site name and channel group name.
Page 383 For example, "ID:0-01-063" for the LTR System displays in Channel Name Display Mode 2. HOLD HOLD System 3 System 3 I D: 0- 01- 063 I D: 0- 01- 063 512. 0000 0 - 0 1 - 0 6 3 S0: 1 - - - - - - - - - S0: 1 - - - - - - - - - GRP - - - - - - - - - -...
Page 384: Hold On Trunked System
*In Motorola System, System ID is displayed as "SID:xxxxh-yyzz". “xxxxh” means System ID. “yy” means Sub System ID. This is always is 00 for Motorola analog systems. “zz” means SITE ID. *WACN ID is displayed as “WACN:xxxxx”. For a system other than an EDACS SCAT System, the scanner monitors the received signal on the C-Ch or V- *For EDACS SCAT Systems, the scanner only monitors Voice Data.
Page 385: Hold On Talkgroup Id From Id Search / Id Scan
Hold on TalkGroup ID from ID Search / ID Scan The scanner monitors the held TGID continuously. While monitoring a TGID already stored into Memory, the first line displays alternates between the current site name and the current group name, and the second line displays the current channel name. Also, the SQK and GGK numbers for the current monitoring site and channel group appears.
Page 386 Store TGID To quickly store a TGID into a channel, enter the TGID using the number and decimal keys. Press the decimal key twice to enter a hyphen. If you press the decimal key first or at the left end, it will be entered as "i"...
Page 387: Direct Entry
Direct Access Use this feature to quickly access a channel with number tags. System or channel number tags can be set in the menu. However if you set a channel number tag that already exists in the same system, or if you set a system tag that already exists in another system (include scan systems, service search with scan systems, custom search with scan systems, CC Hits with scan systems), a warning message will be displayed “No.Tag Exists Accept? (Y/N)”.
Page 388: Key Operation During Scan Hold Mode
Key Operation During Scan Hold Mode Normal Mode [Scroll Control] knob Turn this knob to select the channel. [Scan / srch] key Press this key to resume scanning. [Hold / ] key Press this key to resume scanning. Long press this key to activate System Hold Mode and resume scanning. [L/O] key Press this key once to temporarily lock out the held frequency or TGID.
Page 389 [FUNC] key Press this key to go to Function Mode with a 3-second timeout. The scanner displays the system number tag and channel number tag. If you do not press a key within 3 seconds, function mode is automatically cancelled. Long press this key to go to Function Mode without a timeout.
Page 390 [1-3 / sr1-3] key Press this key to start searching the search range set at Set Search Key. [4 / LEFT / ifx] key Press this key to exchange the IF(intermediate frequency) for receiving radio signals to avoid interference. [5 / lvl ] key Press this key to change the volume offset level.
Page 391: Priority Scan
PRIORITY SCAN There are two kinds of Priority Scan. (See: Set Priority) Refer to Set Priority for setting Priority Channels. Priority Scan This works in Scan Mode or Scan Hold Mode when the Priority Scan setting is on. In this condition, " PRI" icon appears.
Page 392: Key Operation During Priority Scan
Priority Plus Scan This works in Scan Mode or Scan Hold Mode when the setting of Priority Scan is Plus On. In this condition, the "PRI" icon blinks and the scanner scans only Priority Channels. System 1 SCAN ↑ S0: 1 2 * * 5 * 7 8 * 0 GRP 1 2 - - - 6 - - - 0 If there is no Priority Channel or all Priority Channels are locked out, the scanner displays "Priority Scan No Channel"...
Page 393: Priority Id Scan
PRIORITY ID SCAN Refer to Set Priority to set Priority Channels. Refer to Priority ID Scan for activation of Priority ID Scan. Priority ID Scan Priority ID Scan works in ID Scan/Search Mode or ID Scan/Search Hold Mode when the Priority ID Scan setting is on.
Page 394: Search Mode
SEARCH MODE The scanner has Service Search, Custom Search and Quick Search in Search Mode. Display during Search Mode The LCD display in Search mode is as follows. Custom 1 This shows a search range name. 50. 0000MHz ↑ This shows the searching direction. NFM ATT C67.
Page 395: Service Search
Service Search You can search one of the pre-programmed search ranges. Publi c Safety 30. 8600MHz ↑ The Scanner starts from the lowest frequency of the selected range and searches in ascending or descending order. While searching, turn [Scroll Control] to change the searching direction. If the scanner finds a transmission, it stops on the frequency and the second line displays the frequency and the unit “MHz”.
Page 396: Custom Search
Custom Search Custom search can start by selecting Custom Search. When performing a custom search, you can turn on or off custom ranges by pressing the [0 - 9] keys. You cannot turn off the last Custom Range. If you try, the scanner sounds an Error Tone. The scanner only searches turned on custom ranges.
Page 397: Custom Search In Control Channel Only Mode
Custom Search Range Select : You can select the range by turning [Scroll Control] in Function Mode. When the scanner returns to Normal Mode, it searches from the selected range. If you select a range that is turned off, the scanner turns on the range and starts searching from the range. Custom Search in Control Channel Only Mode This is valid only for Custom ranges that have the C-CH Only setting turned on at Set C-Ch Only.
Page 398: Search And Store
Receive LTR Control Channel: The scanner displays “LT System” and TGID. The scanner toggles the following display while receiving it. Custom 1 LT System I D: 0- 01- 001 I D: 0- 01- 001 851. 0125 851. 0125 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Key Operation : Turn [Scroll Control] to resume Frequency Search.
Page 399 Quick Search for frequency The scanner searches from the current channel frequency when the Quick Search starts from monitoring / holding in conventional systems, Close Call Mode, Weather Scan Mode and Tone-Out Mode. The range of this searching is all ranges of the scanner. Turn [Scroll Control] to change the searching direction.
Page 400: Key Operation During Search Mode
Key Operation During Search Mode Normal Mode [Scroll Control] knob Turn this knob to change the searching direction. While monitoring a frequency, turn this knob to resume searching. [SCAN / srch] key Press this key to go to Scan Mode. [Hold / ] key Press this key to go to Search Hold Mode.
Page 401 [1 - 3 / sr 1 - 3] key Press this key to start searching the search range set at Set Search Key. [4 / LEFT / ifx] Key While monitoring a frequency, press this key to exchange IF(intermediate frequency). [6 / RIGHT / disp] Key Press this key to change the system ID display and system ID name display in custome search if C-Ch Only Mode is on.
Page 402: Search Hold Mode
SEARCH HOLD MODE Press [Hold / ] in Search Mode to go to Search Hold Mode and the scanner holds on the current frequency. General Operation The scanner monitors the frequency continuously. The scanner displays the search range name on the first line.
Page 403: Quick Save
Quick Save Press [E / yes / gps] without entering data to quickly store the held frequency. This Quick Save function is almost the same as Direct Entry. (See: Direct Entry for details.) The name of the stored frequency is the frequency when the scanner is not receiving location data from a GPS unit.
Page 404: Key Operation During Search Hold Mode
Key Operation During Search Hold Mode Normal Mode [Scroll Control] knob Turn this knob to change the searching direction. While monitoring a frequency, turn this knob to resume searching. [SCAN / srch] key Press this key to go to Scan Mode. [Hold / ] key Press this key to resume searching.
Page 405 [L/O] key Press this key to go to Rvw Search L/O. [1 - 3 / sr 1 - 3] key Press this key to start searching the search range set at Set Search Key. [4 / LEFT / ifx] Key Press this key to exchange IF(intermediate frequency) for the current frequency.
Page 406 CLOSE CALL MODE The basic Close Call feature allows the scanner to immediately lock onto a transmission above a threshold signal strength. The way the scanner treats a Close Call is based on settings of the menu at Srch/CloCall Opt and Close Call. Display during Close Call Mode CC Found! Press Any Key...
Page 407 Press [Hold / ] to go to Close Call Hold Mode on the frequency. If the scanner gets a Close Call hit in GPS Mode, it displays “Press FUNC Key” on the 4th line. 1h 10m 15. 03 mi HOME Press FUNC Key You can listen to the detected frequency by pressing [FUNC] or [Hold / CC Override is Off:...
Page 408: Close Call Mode
Monitoring Close Call Transmission: While monitoring a Close Call transmission, the scanner displays "Close Call" on the first line and the frequency on the second line. The modulation is displayed and the Close Call icon blinks. If Attenuation, Broadcast Screen or Repeater Find for Srch/CloCall Opt are on, each icon is displayed. For example, if the scanner finds a transmission on 462.7125 MHz, it displays as follows.
Page 409 Close Call Only The scanner performs this by menu at Close Call Only. Or, long press [Hold / ] in function mode to perform this quickly. The scanner only tries to find a Close Call transmission. “Close Call” will be displayed on the first line and the Close Call meter is displayed in the second line. This meter indicates the transmission signal level of each band.
Page 410: Close Call Auto Store
Monitoring Close Call Transmission: In this monitoring state, the scanner does not check other Close Call transmissions. Press [Hold / while monitoring the hit to go to Close Call Hold. While the scanner is monitoring the transmission, turn [Scroll Control] to resume Close Call. If all the bands are Off at Set CC Bands, the scanner cannot check for Close Call hits.
Page 411: Cc Hit With Scan
If the scanner finds a Close Call transmission, it displays "CC Found!" on the first line. Then it performs duplication check in the "Close Call" System and displays "Memory Check" on the first line. While storing the frequency to Memory, it displays "Storing" on the first line. The scanner will stop storing if the number of found frequencies reaches Max Auto Store.
Page 412: Key Operation During Close Call Only Mode
When the scanner monitors or holds on a Close Call transmission, press [E / yes / gps] to quickly store the current frequency. While monitoring a Close Call frequency, if you turn [Scroll Control], the scanner goes to Quick Search Hold Mode with the frequency.
Page 413: Key Operation During Close Call Hold Mode
[Hold / ] key Press this key to set the Close Call Mode to off and go to Scan Mode. [L/O] key Press this key to go to Rvw Search L/O. [1 - 3 / sr 1 - 3] key Press this key to start searching the search range set at Set Search Key.
Page 414 [L/O] key Press this key to temporarily lock out the current frequency. When the scanner is turned off, the frequency is unlocked. Press this key twice in a second to permanently lock out the current frequency. When the scanner is turned off, the frequency stays locked.
Page 415 [9 / mod] Key Press this key to change the modulation mode. [0 / WX] key Press this key to change WX Alert Priority Mode. Long press this key to start WX Scan. [E / yes / gps] key Press this key to change to the GPS Mode. [Menu] key Press this key to go to Close Call Thursday, May 14, 2009...
Page 416: Weather Scan Mode
WEATHER SCAN MODE You can start scanning the 10 Weather Channels either by using the menu or by pressing Function and long pressing [0 / WX]. The scanner scans the 10 Weather Channels normally, or alerts when a 1050 Hz Weather Alert Tone or a SAME Weather Alert is broadcast on a Weather Channel.
Page 417: Weather (Alert) Scan Hold
Warni ng WX Alert If the scanner is set to one of the SAME Groups, the scanner attempts to decode the SAME data packets that precede the Alert Tone. Then the scanner sounds a Weather Alert Siren (for Warning, Watch or Advisory) when the received County is the same as the programmed data.
Page 418: Weather Alert Priority (Wx Alt Priority)
The scanner does not sound until it detects the 1050 Hz Weather Alert Tone or decodes the SAME data in Weather Alert Scan Hold. See: Weather Alert Scan for operation when it detects the1050 Hz Weather Alert Tone or decodes the SAME data. Press [Hold / ] again to return to Weather (Alert) Scan.
Page 419: Key Operation During Weather (Alert) Scan Hold Mode
Function Mode [SCAN / srch] key Press this key to display the prompt for starting Quick Search. The scanner displays the prompt. Press [E / yes / gps] to start Quick Search, press [. / no / pri] to go to Menu Mode at Search for..., press [L/O] to cancel the prompt or press [Hold / ] to go to Quick Search Hold Mode.
Page 420 [E / yes / gps] key Press this key to quickly store the current frequency. [MENU] key Press this key to go to the Menu Mode at Top Menu. Function Mode [SCAN / srch] key Press to display the Quick Search prompt. Press [E / yes / gps] to start Quick Search, press [. / no / pri] to go to Search for..., press [L/O] to cancel the prompt or press [Hold / ] to go to Quick Search Hold.
Page 421: Tone-Out Mode
TONE-OUT MODE Select “Tone-Out Standby” in Tone-Out for … Note: In this function, Close Call and WX Priority don't operate. Display during Tone-Out Mode Tone-Out Standby This shows Tone-Out Standby Status. Tone- Out Standby This shows Tone-Out channel name. Tone- Out 1 I FX CH1 This shows Tone-Out channel number.
Page 422: Tone-Out Standby Mode
Tone-Out Standby Mode If at least one of Tone A and Tone B have a programmed tone, the scanner goes to Tone-Out Standby. While monitoring the Tone-Out frequency, the speaker is muted until matching Tones are detected.  For two-tone pages, enter a value for Tone A and Tone B. ...
Page 423 Multi-Channel Monitoring The scanner can check multiple tone combination for channels that have the same settings for frequency, Modulation and Attenuator. For example, the scanner can check tone combination from CH 1 to CH3 at the same time when you program the scanner with the following settings.
Page 424: Tone-Out Search Mode
Tone-Out Search Mode When both Tone A and Tone B are set to 0.0Hz, this channel will be treated as a Tone-Out Search channel. The scanner starts the Tone-Out Search. During monitoring the Tone-Out frequency, the speaker is muted until Tones are detected. In Tone-Out Search mode, if a transmission is detected, the scanner starts to check for two-tone pages, single-tone pages and group tones.
Page 425: Tone-Out Hold Mode
Tone-Out Hold Mode You can hear the transmission in Hold Mode. When the transmission ends and the delay time expires, the scanner returns to standby condition or search condition. Or pressing [Hold / ] also returns to standby condition or search condition. The scanner displays the following in Tone-Out Hold Mode.
Page 426: Key Operation During Tone-Out Mode
Key Operation During Tone-Out Mode Normal Mode [Scroll Control] Knob Turn this knob to change the channel. Then the scanner is muted if it releases the mute. [Scan / srch] key Press this key to go to Scan Mode. [Hold / ] Key In Tone-Out Standby Mode or Tone-Out Search Mode, press this key to go to Tone-Out Hold Mode and release the mute.
Page 427 Function Mode [Scan / srch] key Press this key to display the prompt for starting Quick Search. The scanner displays the prompt. Press [E / yes / gps] to start Quick Search, press [. / no / pri] to go to Menu Mode at Search for..., press [L/O] to cancel the prompt or press [Hold / ] to go to Quick Search Hold Mode.
Page 428: Gps Mode
GPS MODE By connecting a GPS Unit, the scanner can operate the following functions.  Automatic lockout control for Scan Systems, Sites, and Channel Groups  Navigation to POI (Point Of Interest)  Location Alerts This mode guides to the destination by connecting a GPS Unit to the serial port of the scanner and receiving location data through it.
Page 429 Examples of each Display Mode are as follows. SW 01: 23P SW 1h 10m SW 13: 23 39 mph 544 ft 15. 03 mi 15. 03 mi HOME HOME ↑ ↑ ↑ SCAN SCAN SCAN GPS DATA Display ETA Display Clock Display N 32 ”...
Page 430: Location Alert Operation
Display Formats of Each Information: The advance direction: This is one of N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW. The time: The time is displayed as "hh:mm" (hh: hour, mm: minute). If "12H" is selected at Set Time Format, "A" or "P" is displayed at a right end. The speed: This is a triple digits.
Page 431 Display with Location Alert This shows Location Alert System Type. ALERT for Road 0. 500mi This shows that the scanner is in Location Alert. R183 at Beltli ne This shows the distance to Location Alert. ↑ SCAN This shows Location Alert name. This shows the direction of Location Alert.
Page 432 The scanner alerts only once for each range when it meets both of the following two conditions.  First condition is heading for Alert Point. This is cleared when you heading is within ±45˚ of the value that is set in Set Heading. ...
Page 433: Registration Of Location Information
Priority for Location Alert When a Location Alert with a higher priority occurs during a Location Alert, the current Location Alert is canceled and the scanner alerts for the Location with the high priority. The priority order is as follows: Dangerous Road Dangerous Xing Point of Interest...
Page 434: Review Location Mode
Review Location Mode *In this mode, scanning/searching operation, navigation and Location Alert operation are invalid. You can review all created Locations. In GPS Mode, press [E / yes / gps] to go to Review Location Mode. At first, the last displayed Location is selected. The first line displays "Review Location"...
Page 435 If you press [E / yes / gps], the scanner unlocks all locations of the current Type. If you press [. / no / pri], the scanner returns to the previous mode without unlocking. Long press [L/O] in Function Mode: Display the prompt "Unlock All Locations?"...
Page 436: Key Operation During Gps Mode
Key Operation During GPS Mode *Refer to Review Location Mode for Key Operation of Review Location Mode. Normal Mode [Scroll Control] knob Turn this knob to select a POI. While displaying the icon, the location alert arrow changes to a small font. Turn this knob during a location alert to temporarily lockout the displayed Location Alert.
Page 437 Function Mode [Scroll Control] knob Turn this knob to skip to the location that starts with the next alphabetic character. Press this knob to go to Normal Mode. [L/O] key Press this key once to temporarily lockout the current Location Alert during a Location Alert. When the scanner is turned off, the frequency is unlocked.
Page 438: Band Scope Mode
BAND SCOPE MODE Band Scope Mode searches a frequency range and displays the signal level in real time. You can set the center frequency and span of the frequency range. In Hold Mode, you can monitor the displayed frequency. *Close Call, Priority Scan, Weather Scan and GPS functions do not work in Band Scope Mode. Scope Mode SRCH 850.
Page 439: Search Mode
SRCH This icon appears while in Search Mode. This icon appears while in MAX Hold Search Mode. This shows in the same place as " SRCH ". HOLD This icon appears while in Hold Mode. This shows in the same place as " SRCH ". MF 850.
Page 440: Hold Mode
Hold Mode You can monitor frequency displayed in this mode. The scanner displays "HOLD". Center frequency icon and bars do not blink different from Search or Max Hold Search Mode. You can select the frequency to monitor by moving the marker pointer. Turn Scroll Control, the marker changes the frequency every step.
Page 441 You can restart searching by pressing [FUNC] + [L/O]. The scanner also restarts searching if you change any parameter or search mode. In Hold Mode, the scanner searches a search range only once.
Page 442: Search Setting Parameters
Search Setting Parameters Center Frequency This parameter is the center frequency of the search range. *Please see: Band Coverage for acceptable frequencies. When you go to Band Scope Mode from another mode with a frequency, the scanner sets that frequency as the center frequency. Span This parameter is the span of the search range.
Page 443: Key Operation During Band Scope Mode
Key Operation during Band Scope Mode Normal Mode during Normal Screen [Scroll Control] Knob Sets the level in Volume / Squelch Level Control mode. Turn this knob, the marker changes the frequency every step. [Scan / srch] Key Press this key to go to Scan Mode. [Hold / ] Key In Search or Max Hold Search Mode, press this key to go to Hold Mode.
Page 444 [Scan / srch] Key Press this key in Search Mode to go to Max Hold Search Mode. Press this key in Max Hold Search Mode to go to Search Mode. In Hold Mode, press this key to restart searching. [Hold / ] Key Press this key to toggle Close Call functions.
Page 445: Wired Clone Mode
WIRED CLONE MODE You can clone almost all the data of one scanner to another. After connecting the two scanners, turn on the two scanners. Then select "Master" or "Slave" Wired Clone. Confirm State First, you select Master or Slave. Clone Master Clone Slave Press SCAN Key...
Page 446: Error State
Note: When you reboots the Slave Unit, the Unit will check and erase the protected systems first, this process may take a few minutes which depend on the how many protected systems there are. Error State If the data transfer is not successful, the "Error" message appears. Press [L/O] to return to Confirm State.
Page 447: Keylock
KEYLOCK Press [Func] + [ ] to lock or unlock the keypad. If you change this setting, the scanner displays "Keypad Lock" and "On" or "Off". Keypad Lock Keypad Lock While the keypad is locked, any key operation other than [Hold / ],[Func] and turning [Scroll Control] key are invalid.
Page 448: Key Safe Mode
KEY SAFE MODE This mode prevents accidentally changing parameter or modes. This mode is for handing the scanner to someone unfamiliar with its operation. Some keys don't work in this mode. Changed Key Operation in Key Safe Mode The key in which a setting is applied showed in the following table. Service Custom Quick...
Page 449: Key Safe Operation
Key Safe Operation Turns on power supply while pressing and holding [FUNC] key to go to the LAST MODE* in Key Safe Mode. The scanner displays the “Key Safe Mode On” message after displaying the copyright message. In Key Safe Mode, the on power supply while pressing and holding [FUNC] key to return to LAST MODE* in Full Operation.
Page 450: Memory Initialization
MEMORY INITIALIZATION Press and hold [2 / sr 2], [9 / mod] and [Hold / ] and turn on the scanner to initialize the Memory and be able to restore the Preprogram list. The scanner clears all data and returns to initial setting. The display is as follows. All Memory Clear Please Wai t *If you unplug the AC Adapter or turn off the scanner during initialization, the scanner starts initializing...
Page 451: Battery Charge
BATTERY CHARGE Battery Type Select You can power the scanner non-rechargeable batteries (not supplied), nickel metal hydride (Ni-MH) rechargeable batteries or AC adapter. You need to select the battery type before using batteries. Turn off the scanner and remove the battery compartment cover. There is a switch to select the battery type like the following figure.
Page 452 The scanner displays "Pre-Charging". "Pre-Charging" is a transition to the beginning of “Normal Charging”. Pre- Chargi ng When the charge time elapses, it displays “Charge Complete”. Charge Complete If a battery is not installed, it displays “No Battery”. No Battery If the scanner detects that the battery cannot be charged, it displays “Battery Error”.
Page 453 If the scanner detects an illegal voltage (voltage outside the allowable range), it displays “Illegal Voltage” and you cannot turn on power. I llegal Voltage When the scanner is turned on: If the battery is good, the scanner charges the battery and it operates ordinarily. When the scanner cannot judge the battery to be a good one at once, the scanner checks the battery and the battery icon is displayed.
Page 454: Others
OTHERS AVAILABLE SYSTEM SETTINGS Different types of systems and sites have different settings available. *In the following table, "CNV" means Conventional System. System Settings EDACS System Settings CNV* Standard One-Freq WIDE / SCAT Trunk Trunk NARROW Edit Name Edit Sys Option Edit Site Edit Group Copy System...
Page 455: Site Settings
Site Settings EDACS Site Setting Standard One-Freq WIDE / SCAT Trunk Trunk NARROW Edit Name Set Quick Key Set Startup Key Edit Band Plan (P25) Edit Band Plan (Mot) Set Site Type Set Frequencies Set Modulation Set Attenuator Set Lockout Set Hold Time Set LocationInfo P25 Waiting Time...
Page 456: Channel Settings
Channel Settings EDACS Channel Settings CNV* Standard One-Freq WIDE / SCAT Trunk Trunk NARROW Edit Name Edit Frequency Edit TGID Set Audio Type Set Number tag Set Modulation Set Attenuator Set Priority Set Alert Set Lockout Volume Offset Copy Channel Delete Channel New Channel...
Page 457: Tgid Format For Trunked System
TGID FORMAT FOR TRUNKED SYSTEM [ MOTOROLA TYPE1 SYSTEM ] Display Format 1) BFF-SS Normal ID B is 1 digit FF is 2 digits (0 filling) SS is 1-2 digit(s) 2) BFFF-S Normal ID (when FLEET is 100-127) B is 1 digit FFF is 3 digits S is 1 digit 3) B-----...
Page 458 Range : BLOCK (0-7) FF(F) : FLEET S(S) : SUB-FLEET FLEET and SUB-FLEET maximum numbers depend on the SIZE CODE of each BLOCK in FLEET-MAP setting. SIZE CODE 0:BLOCK0 : NNNNN ( 0- 8191) BLOCK1 : NNNNN ( 8192-16383) BLOCK2 : NNNNN (16384-24575) BLOCK3 : NNNNN (24576-32767) BLOCK4 : NNNNN (32768-40959) BLOCK5 : NNNNN (40960-49151)
Page 459 [ MOTOROLA TYPE2 SYSTEM ] <Decimal Format> Display Format 1) NNNNN Normal ID NNNNN is 1-5 digit(s) 2) iNNNNN I-CALL ID NNNNN is 5 digits (0 filling) Input Format 1) NNNNN Normal ID NNNNN is 1-5 digit(s) 2) iNNNNN I-CALL ID NNNNN is 1-5 digits.
Page 460 [ MOTOROLA P25 SYSTEM ] <Decimal Format> Display Format 1) NNNNN Normal ID NNNNN is 1-5 digit(s) 2) iNNNNNNNN I-CALL ID NNNNNNNN is 8 digits (0 filling) Input Format 1) NNNNN Normal ID NNNNN is 1-5 digit(s) 2) iNNNNNNNN I-CALL ID NNNNNNNN is 1-8 digits.
Page 461 [ EDACS SYSTEM ] <AFS format> Display Format 1) AA-FFS Normal ID AA is 2 digits (0 filling) FF is 2 digits (0 filling) S is 1 digit 2) AA---- Partial ID (free FLEET and SUB-FLEET) AA is 2 digits (0 filling) 3) AA-FF- Partial ID (free SUB-FLEET) AA is 2 digits (0 filling)
Page 462 <Decimal format> Display Format 1) NNNN Normal ID NNNN is 1-4 digit(s) (no 0 filling) 2) iNNNNN I-CALL ID NNNNN is 5 digits (0 filling) Input Format 1) NNNN Normal ID NNNN is 1-4 digit(s) 2) iNNNNN I-CALL ID NNNNN is 1-5 digit(s) Range Normal ID : 1-2047 I-CALL ID : i00000-i16383...
Page 463 [ LTR SYSTEM ] Display Format 1) A-RR-NNN Normal ID A is 1 digit RR is 2 digits NNN is 3 digits 2) A-RR---- Partial ID A is 1 digit RR is 2 digits Input Format 1) A-RR-NNN Normal ID A is 1 digit RR is 2 digits NNN is 3 digits...
Page 464: Fleet Map
FLEET MAP The range of TGIDs is from 0 to 65535. This range is split into 8 equal blocks, and each Block is set to one of 15 Size Codes. The range of TGID 0 - 65535 Block 0 0 - 8191 Block 1 8192 - 16383 Block 2...
Page 465: Preset Fleet Maps
Details of each Size Code are as follows. Size Code Fleet-SubFleet-ID Number of Blocks occupied (as Type II ID) 128-4-16 16-8-64 8-8-128 1-16-512 64-4-32 32-8-32 32-4-64 16-4-128 8-4-256 4-8-256 2-16-256 1-16-1024 1-16-2048 1-16-4096 *The numbers of "Fleet-SubFleet-ID" means the number of each. If the number of Fleets is 4, there are 4 Fleets and the range is from 0 to 3.
Page 466: Weather Channels
WEATHER CHANNELS The modulation for all Weather Channels is FM. CH No. Frequency 162.5500 MHz 162.4000 MHz 162.4750 MHz 162.4250 MHz 162.4500 MHz 162.5000 MHz 162.5250 MHz 161.6500 MHz 161.7750 MHz 163.2750 MHz CTCSS FREQUENCY The scanner can detect the following 50 CTCSS frequencies. 67.0Hz 88.5Hz 114.8Hz...
Page 467: Cea2009-Same Event Code(Ansi/Cea-2009-A October 2005)
CEA2009-SAME EVENT CODE(ANSI/CEA-2009-A October 2005) Standard Event Code EVENT LEVEL LCD Display Warning Watch Advisory Administrative Message Admin Message Avalanche Watch Avalanche Avalanche Warning Avalanche Biological Hazard Warning Biological Boil Water Warning Boil Water Blizzard Warning Blizzard Child Abduction Emergency Child Emergency Civil Danger Warning Civil Danger...
Page 468 Land Slide Warning Land Slide National Audible Test National Audible National Information Center National Info Network Notification Message Network Message National Periodic Test Nation Period National Silent Test Nation Silent Nuclear Power Plant Warning Nuclear Plant Power Outage Advisory Power Outage Radiological Hazard Warning Radiological Required Monthly Test...
Page 469: Remote Command
REMOTE COMMAND 【 Remote Communication Format 】 BPS rate : 4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200 bps Start/Stop bit : 1 bit, 1 bit Data Length : 8 bit Parity Check : None Code : ASCII Flow Control : None Return Code : Carriage Return only 【...
Page 470 12. [LONGITUDE] shows West or East Longitude. The data shows “DDDMMSSssL” at DMS Format. Degree ( 000 - 180 : Triple figure fixation ) Minute ( 00 - 59 : Double figure fixation ) SSss Second ( SS : 00 - 59 : Double figure fixation ) ( ss : 00 - 99 : Double figure fixation ) Bearing ( W : West / E : East )
Page 471 Get/Set Trunk Frequency Info Append Channel Group Append TalkGroup ID Group Delete Group / Site Get/Set Group Info Append Channel / Trunk Frequency Append TalkGroup ID Delete Channel Get/Set Channel Info Get/Set TalkGroup ID Info Get Lockout TalkGroup ID (for Rvw L/O ID) Get Search L/O TalkGroup ID Unlock TalkGroup ID (for Rvw L/O ID) Lockout ID (TalkGroup ID)
Page 472 <COMMAND GID> Get Current TGID Status Controller → Radio GID[\r] Radio → Controller GID,[SITE_TYPE],[TGID],[ID_SRCH_MODE],[NAME1],[NAME2],[NAME3][\r] [SITE_TYPE] : Site Type : CONVENTIONAL system site : MOTOROLA system site : EDACS Narrow / Wide system site : EDACS SCAT system site : LTR system site P25S : P25 STANDARD system site P25F...
Page 473 <COMMAND KEY> Push KEY Controller → Radio KEY,[KEY_CODE],[KEY_MODE][\r] Radio → Controller KEY,OK[\r] [KEY_CODE] : MENU : FUNC : HOLD : SCAN/SEARCH : L/O .(dot) : ./NO : E/YES > : VFO RIGHT * Set "P" to KEY_MODE. < : VFO LEFT * Set "P"...
Page 474 <COMMAND POF> Power OFF Controller → Radio POF[\r] Radio → Controller POF,OK[\r] Turns off the scanner. After this command, the scanner doesn't accept any command. <COMMAND QSH> Go to quick search hold mode Controller → Radio QSH,[FRQ],[RSV],[MOD],[ATT],[DLY],[RSV],[CODE_SRCH],[BSC],[REP],[RSV], [AGC_ANALOG],[AGC_DIGITAL],[P25WAITING][\r] Radio → Controller QSH,OK[\r] QSH,NG[\r] [FRQ]...
Page 475 FUNCTION UASD specifies arbitrary frequency and changes to Quick Search Hold (VFO) mode. Parameter, such as STP, changes the contents of Srch/CloCall option. Note: Even when only [FRQ] parameter is set, this command will work. <COMMAND QSC> Set current frequency and get reception status Controller →...
Page 476 This command is invalid when the scanner is in Menu Mode, during Direct Entry operation, during Quick Save operation. FUNCTION UASD specifies arbitrary frequency and changes to Quick Search Hold (VFO) mode. Parameter, such as STP, changes the contents of Srch/CloCall option. <COMMAND CSC>...
Page 477 <COMMAND STS> Get Current Status Controller → Radio STS[\r] Radio → Controller STS,[DSP_FORM],[L1_CHAR],[L1_MODE],[L2_CHAR],[L2_MODE],[L3_CHAR],[L3_MODE], [L4_CHAR],[L4_MODE],････,[L8_CHAR],[L8_MODE],[SQL],[MUT],[BAT],[WAT],[RSV], [RSV],[SIG_LVL],[BK_COLOR],[BK_DIMMER][\r] [DSP_FORM] : Display Form (4 - 8dight:########) (each # is 0 or 1) 0 means Small Font / 1 means Large Font. [L1_CHAR] : Line1 Characters 16char (fixed length) [L1_MODE] : Line1 Display Mode 16char [L2_CHAR]...
Page 478 ← [L3_MODE] Srch/CloCall Opt, ← [L4_CHAR] ← [L4_MODE] 1,0,0,0,,,0,GREEN,,[\r] Returns current scanner status. Ex.2) ┌----------------┐ ｜ HOLD L/O │System 1 ｜ Squelch Status : CLOSE │ 851.0125MHz Mute Status : ON │ NFM ATT Battery Low Status : No Alert │S1: Weather Alert Status : Alert...
Page 479 [SYS_TAG] : Current system number tag (0-999/NONE) [CHAN_TAG] : Current channel number tag (0-999/NONE) [P25NAC] : P25 NAC Status ( 0-FFF: 0-FFF / NONE: Nac None) Get reception status. The Scanner returns GLG,,,,,,,,,[\r] until it detects a frequency or a TGID. <COMMAND JPM>...
Page 480 <COMMAND MNU> Menu Mode Controller → Radio MNU,[MENU_INDEX][\r] → Controller Radio MNU,OK[\r] [MENU_INDEX] SVC_MENU : Service Search Select Menu WX_MENU : WX Select Menu CCBAND_MENU : Close Call Band Filter Menu SCR_OPT_MENU : Broadcast Screen Band Menu GL_LIST_MENU : Search Global Lockout List Review Menu SETTING_MENU : Setting Menu Note) Scanner returns NG in the state that the mode switch cannot be done.
Page 481 <COMMAND PRG> Enter Program Mode Controller → Radio PRG[\r] Radio → Controller PRG,OK[\r] PRG,NG[\r] This command is invalid when the scanner is in Menu Mode, during Direct Entry operation, during Quick Save operation. The scanner goes to Program Mode. The scanner displays "Remote Mode" on first line and "Keypad Lock" on second line in Program Mode.
Page 482 <COMMAND BSV > Get/Set Battery Info Controller → Radio BSV [\r] BSV,[BAT_SAVE],[CHARGE_TIME][\r] Radio → Controller BSV, [BAT_SAVE],[CHARGE_TIME] [\r] BSV,OK[\r] [BAT_SAVE] Battery Save (0:OFF / 1:ON) [CHARGE_TIME] Battery Charge Time (1-16) < COMMAND COM > Get/Set COM port setting Controller → Radio COM,[/r] COM,[BAUDRATE],[RSV][/r] Radio →...
Page 483 <COMMAND KBP> Get/Set Key Beep and setting Controller → Radio KBP[\r] KBP,[LEVEL],[LOCK],[SAFE][\r] Radio → Controller KBP,[LEVEL],[LOCK],[SAFE][\r] KBP,OK[\r] [LEVEL] : Beep Level (0:Auto / 1-15 / 99:OFF) [LOCK] : Key Lock status (0:OFF / 1:ON) [SAFE] : Key Safe status (0:OFF / 1:ON) Get/Set Key Beep Setting.
Page 484 <COMMAND AGV> Get/Set Auto Gain Control Controller → Radio AGV[\r] AGV,[RSV],[RSV],[A_RES],[A_REF],[A_GAIN],[D_RES],[A_GAIN] [\r] Radio → Controller AGV,[RSV],[RSV],[A_RES],[A_REF],[A_GAIN],[D_RES],[A_GAIN] [\r] AGV,OK[\r] [A_RES] : Analog Response Time (-4 - +6) [A_REF] : Analog Reference Gain (-5 - +5) [A_GAIN] : Analog Gain Range ( 0 - 15) [D_RES] : Digital Response Time (-8 - +8) [D_GAIN]...
Page 485 <COMMAND QSL> Get/Set System/Site Quick Lockout Controller → Radio QSL[\r] QSL,[PAGE0],[PAGE1],[PAGE2],[PAGE3],[PAGE4],[PAGE5],[PAGE6],[PAGE7],[PAGE8], [PAGE9][\r] Radio → Controller QSL,[PAGE0],[PAGE1],[PAGE2],[PAGE3],[PAGE4],[PAGE5],[PAGE6],[PAGE7],[PAGE8], [PAGE9][\r] QSL,OK[\r] [PAGE0] – [PAGE9] : ########## (each # is 0 - 2) 0 : Not assigned (Displayed as “-“ on the scanner.) 1 : On (Displayed as each number on the scanner.) 2 : Off (Displayed as “*”...
Page 486 <COMMAND CSY> Create System Controller → Radio CSY,[SYS_TYPE],[PROTECT][\r] Radio → Controller CSY,[SYS_INDEX][\r] [SYS_TYPE] : System Type : CONVENTIONAL : MOTOROLA TYPE : EDACS Narrow / Wide : EDACS SCAT : LTR P25S : P25 STANDARD P25F : P25 One Frequency TRUNK [SYS_INDEX] : The Index of Created System [PROTECT]...
Page 487 <COMMAND SIN> Get/Set System Info Controller → Radio SIN,[INDEX][\r] SIN,[INDEX],[NAME],[QUICK_KEY],[HLD],[LOUT],[DLY],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV], [RSV],[START_KEY],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[NUMBER_TAG], [AGC_ANALOG],[AGC_DIGITAL],[P25WAITING][\r] Radio → Controller SIN,[SYS_TYPE],[NAME],[QUICK_KEY],[HLD],[LOUT],[DLY],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV], [RSV],[REV_INDEX],[FWD_INDEX],[CHN_GRP_HEAD],[CHN_GRP_TAIL],[SEQ_NO], [START_KEY],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV], [NUMBER_TAG],[AGC_ANALOG], [AGC_DIGITAL],[P25WAITING],[PROTECT],[RSV][\r] SIN,OK[\r] [INDEX] : System Index [SYS_TYPE] : System Type : CONVENTIONAL : MOTOROLA TYPE : EDACS Narrow / Wide : EDACS SCAT : LTR P25S : P25 STANDARD...
Page 488 <COMMAND TRN> Get/Set Trunk Info Controller → Radio TRN,[INDEX][\r] TRN,[INDEX],[ID_SEARCH],[S_BIT],[END_CODE],[AFS],[RSV],[RSV],[EMG],[EMGL], [FMAP],[CTM_FMAP],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV] [MOT_ID],[EMG_COLOR],[EMG_PATTERN],[P25NAC],[PRI_ID_SCAN][\r] Radio → Controller TRN,[ID_SEARCH],[S_BIT],[END_CODE],[AFS],[RSV],[RSV],[EMG],[EMGL],[FMAP], [CTM_FMAP],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV], [TGID_GRP_HEAD],[TGID_GRP_TAIL],[ID_LOUT_GRP_HEAD],[ID_LOUT_GRP_TAIL], [MOT_ID],[EMG_COLOR],[EMG_PATTERN],[P25NAC],[PRI_ID_SCAN][\r] TRN,OK[\r] [INDEX] : System Index [ID_SEARCH] : ID Search/Scan (0:ID Scan mode / 1: Search Mode) [S_BIT] : Motorola Status Bit (0:Ignore, 1:Yes) [END_CODE] : Motorola End Code(0:Ignore,1:Analog,2:Analog and Digital)
Page 489 <COMMAND AST> Append Site Controller → Radio AST,[SYS_INDEX],[RSV][\r] Radio → Controller AST,[SITE_INDEX][\r] [SYS_INDEX] : System Index [SITE_INDEX] : Appended Site Index Append Site to the system. Returns "-1" if the scanner failed to create because of no resource. This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode. <COMMAND SIF>...
Page 490 The scanner returns only "," to punctuate for parameters which are not appropriate the site type. In set command, the scanner neglects the parameters that are not appropriate the system type. In set command, only "," parameters are not changed. The set command is aborted if any format error is detected.
Page 491 <COMMAND ABP> Get/Set APCO-P25 Band Plan Controller → Radio ① ABP,[INDEX][\r] ② ABP,[INDEX],[BASE_FREQ_0],[SPACING_FREQ_0],[BASE_FREQ_1],[SPACING_FREQ_1], . [BASE_FREQ_E],[SPACING_FREQ_E],[BASE_FREQ_F],[SPACING_FREQ_F][\r] Radio → Controller ① ABP,[BASE_FREQ_0],[SPACING_FREQ_0],[BASE_FREQ_1],[SPACING_FREQ_1], . . [BASE_FREQ_E],[SPACING_FREQ_E],[BASE_FREQ_F],[SPACING_FREQ_F][\r] ② ABP,OK[\r] [INDEX] : Site Index [BASE_FREQ_n] : Base frequency (MHz)(25.0000MHz to 1300.0000MHz, 5.0Hz step) Base_FREQ_n = (base frequency * 10^6) / 5 (Hexadecimal number) [SPACING_FREQ_n] : Spacing frequency(kHz)(0.125kHz to 128.0kHz,...
Page 492 <COMMAND TFQ> Get/Set Trunk Frequency Info Controller → Radio TFQ,[CHN_INDEX][\r] TFQ,[CHN_INDEX],[FRQ],[LCN],[LOUT],[RSV],[NUMBER_TAG],[VOL_OFFSET], [RSV] [\r] Radio → Controller TFQ,[FRQ],[LCN],[LOUT],[REV_INDEX],[FWD_INDEX],[SYS_INDEX],[GRP_INDEX],[RSV], [NUMBER_TAG],[VOL_OFFSET],[RSV][\r] TFQ,OK[\r] [CHN_INDEX] : Trunk Frequency Index [FRQ] : Trunk Frequency [LCN] : LCN (EDACS WIDE/NARROW system: 0 to 20 LTR system: 0 to 30) [LOUT] : Lockout (0:Unlocked / 1:Lockout)
Page 493 <COMMAND AGT> Append TGID Group Controller → Radio AGT,[SYS_INDEX][\r] Radio → Controller AGT,[GRP_INDEX][\r] [SYS_INDEX] : System Index [GRP_INDEX] : appended TGID Group Index Append TGID Group to the system. Returns "-1" if the scanner failed to create because of no resource. This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode.
Page 494 Get/Set Group Information. In set command, only "," parameters are not changed. The set command is aborted if any format error is detected. When the system protect bit is ON, except [NAME], [REV_INDEX], [FWD_INDEX], [SYS_INDEX], [CHN_HEAD], [CHN_TAIL], other parameters will be send as a reserve parameter in the Radio ->...
Page 495 <COMMAND CIN> Get/Set Channel Info Controller → Radio CIN,[INDEX][\r] CIN,[INDEX],[NAME],[FRQ],[MOD],[CTCSS/DCS],[TLOCK],[LOUT],[PRI],[ATT],[ALT], [ALTL],[RSV],[AUDIO_TYPE],[P25NAC],[NUMBER_TAG],[ALT_COLOR],[ALT_PATTERN], [VOL_OFFSET] [\r] Radio → Controller CIN,[NAME],[FRQ],[MOD],[CTCSS/DCS],[TLOCK],[LOUT],[PRI],[ATT],[ALT],[ALTL], [REV_INDEX],[FWD_INDEX],[SYS_INDEX],[GRP_INDEX],[RSV],[AUDIO_TYPE],[P25NAC], [NUMBER_TAG],[ALT_COLOR],[ ALT_PATTERN],[VOL_OFFSET] [\r] CIN,OK[\r] [INDEX] : Channel Index [NAME] : Name (max.16char) [FRQ] : Channel Frequency [MOD] : Modulation (AUTO/AM/FM/NFM/WFM/FMB) [ATT] : Attenuation (0:OFF / 1:ON) [CTCSS/DCS] : CTCSS/DCS Status...
Page 496 <COMMAND TIN> Get/Set TGID Info Controller → Radio TIN,[INDEX][\r] TIN,[INDEX],[NAME],[TGID],[LOUT],[PRI],[ALT],[ALTL],[RSV],[AUDIO_TYPE], [NUMBER_TAG],[ ALT_COLOR],[ALT_PATTERN],[VOL_OFFSET][\r] Radio → Controller TIN,[NAME],[TGID],[LOUT],[PRI],[ALT],[ALTL],[REV_INDEX],[FWD_INDEX], [SYS_INDEX],[GRP_INDEX],[RSV],[AUDIO_TYPE], [NUMBER_TAG],[ ALT_COLOR], [ALT_PATTERN],[VOL_OFFSET] [\r] TIN,OK[\r] [INDEX] : TGID Index [NAME] : Name (max.16char) [TGID] : TGID [LOUT] : Lockout (0:Unlocked / 1:Lockout) [PRI] : Priority (0:OFF / 1:ON) [ALT]...
Page 497 <COMMAND SLI> Get Search L/O TGID Controller → Radio SLI,[SYS_INDEX][\r] Radio → Controller SLI,[TGID][\r] SLI,-1[\r] : No more lockout TGID This command is used to get Search L/O TGID list of the system. Search L/O TGID is the L/O TGID which doesn't belong to any group in the system as a TGID.
Page 498 <COMMAND FWD> Get Fwd Index Controller → Radio FWD,[INDEX][\r] Radio → Controller FWD,[INDEX][\r] [INDEX] : Index of system, site, group, channel, TGID or Location Alert System. Returns forward index of the index in the memory chain. Returns -1 if no more index exists. This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode.
Page 499 <COMMAND LIT> Get Location Alert System Index Tail Controller → Radio LIT,[LAS_TYPE][\r] Radio → Controller LIT,[INDEX][\r] [LAS_TYPE] : Location Alert Type (POI:POI / DROAD:Dangerous Road / DXING :Dangerous Xing) Returns the last index of stored location alert system list. This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode. <COMMAND CLA>...
Page 500 <COMMAND LIN> Get/Set Location Alert System Info Controller → Radio LIN,[INDEX][\r] LIN,[INDEX],[LAS_TYPE],[NAME],[LOUT],[ALT],[ALTL],[LATITUDE],[LONGITUDE], [RANGE],[SPEED],[DIR],[ALT_COLOR],[ALT_PATTERN][\r] Radio → Controller LIN,[LAS_TYPE],[NAME],[LOUT],[ALT],[ALTL],[REV_INDEX],[FWD_INDEX],[SEQ_NO], [LATITUDE],[LONGITUDE],[RANGE],[SPEED],[DIR],[ALT_COLOR],[ALT_PATTERN] [\r] LIN,OK[\r] [INDEX] : Location Alert System Index [LAS_TYPE] : Location Alert Type (POI: POI / DROAD: Dangerous Road / DXING: Dangerous Xing) [NAME] : Name (max.16char)
Page 501 <COMMAND SCO> Get/Set Search/Close Call Settings Controller → Radio SCO[\r] SCO,[RSV],[MOD],[ATT],[DLY],[RSV],[CODE_SRCH],[BSC],[REP],[RSV],[RSV], [MAX_STORE],[RSV],[AGC_ANALOG],[AGC_DIGITAL],[P25WAITING][\r] Radio → Controller SCO,[RSV],[MOD],[ATT],[DLY],[RSV],[CODE_SRCH],[BSC],[REP],[RSV],[RSV], [MAX_STORE],[RSV],[AGC_ANALOG],[AGC_DIGITAL],[P25WAITING] [\r] SCO,OK[\r] [MOD] : Modulation (AUTO/AM/FM/NFM/WFM/FMB) [ATT] : Attenuation (0:OFF / 1:ON) [DLY] : Delay Time (-10,-5,-2,0,1,2,5,10,30) [CODE_SRCH] : CTCSS/DCS Search (0:OFF / 1: CTCSS/DCS / 2: P25 NAC Search) [BSC] : Broadcast Screen (16digit: ########･･#)
Page 502 <COMMAND SHK> Get/Set Search Key Settings Controller → Radio SHK[\r] SHK,[SRCH_KEY_1],[SRCH_KEY_2],[SRCH_KEY_3],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV][\r] Radio → Controller SHK,[SRCH_KEY_1],[SRCH_KEY_2],[SRCH_KEY_3],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV][\r],SHK,OK[\r] [SRCH_KEY_1] - [SRCH_KEY_3] : Search Range .(dot) : Not assign PublicSafety: Public Safety range CUSTOM_1: Custom 1 range News : News range CUSTOM_2: Custom 2 range : HAM Radio range CUSTOM_3: Custom 3 range Marine...
Page 503 <COMMAND LOF > Lock Out Frequency Controller → Radio LOF,[FRQ][\r] Radio → Controller LOF,OK[\r] [FRQ] : Frequency (250000-13000000) This command locks out a frequency. The frequency is added to L/O list. This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode. <COMMAND CLC> Get/Set Close Call Settings Controller →...
Page 504 <COMMAND SSP> Get/Set Service Search Settings Controller → Radio SSP,[SRCH_INDEX][\r] SSP,[SRCH_INDEX],[DLY],[ATT],[HLD],[LOUT],[QUICK_KEY],[START_KEY],[RSV], [NUMBER_TAG],[AGC_ANALOG],[AGC_DIGITAL],[P25WAITING] [\r] Radio → Controller SSP,[SRCH_INDEX],[DLY],[ATT],[HLD],[LOUT],[QUICK_KEY],[START_KEY],[RSV], [NUMBER_TAG],[AGC_ANALOG],[AGC_DIGITAL],[P25WAITING] [\r] SSP,OK[\r] [SRCH_INDEX] : Service Search Range 1 : Public Safety 6 : Air 12 : Special 2 : News 7 : CB Radio 15 : Military Air 3 : HAM Radio 8 : FRS/GMRS/MURS...
Page 505 <COMMAND CBP> Get/Set C-Ch Only Custom Search MOT Band Plan Settings Controller → Radio CBP,[SRCH_INDEX][\r] CBP,[SRCH_INDEX],[MOT_TYPE],[LOWER1],[UPPER1],[STEP1],[OFFSET1],[LOWER2], [UPPER2],[STEP2],[OFFSET2],[LOWER3],[UPPER3],[STEP3],[OFFSET3],[LOWER4], [UPPER4],[STEP4],[OFFSET4],[LOWER5],[UPPER5],[STEP5],[OFFSET5],[LOWER6], [UPPER6],[STEP6],[OFFSET6][\r], Radio → Controller CBP,[MOT_TYPE],[LOWER1],[UPPER1],[STEP1],[OFFSET1],[LOWER2],[UPPER2],[STEP2], [OFFSET2],[LOWER3],[UPPER3],[STEP3],[OFFSET3],[LOWER4],[UPPER4],[STEP4], [OFFSET4],[LOWER5],[UPPER5],[STEP5],[OFFSET5],[LOWER6],[UPPER6],[STEP6], [OFFSET6][\r], CBP, OK[\r] [SRCH_INDEX : Index (1-9,0 means 10) [MOT_TYPE] : Band type for MOT(STD/ SPL/CUSTOM) [LOWER n] : Lower Frequency n [UPPER n]...
Page 506 <COMMAND CSP> Get/Set Custom Search Settings Controller → Radio CSP,[SRCH_INDEX][\r] CSP,[SRCH_INDEX],[NAME],[LIMIT_L],[LIMIT_H],[STP],[MOD],[ATT],[DLY],[RSV], [HLD],[LOUT],[C-CH],[RSV],[RSV],[QUICK_KEY],[START_KEY],[RSV],[NUMBER_TAG], [AGC_ANALOG],[AGC_DIGITAL],[P25WAITING][\r] Radio → Controller CSP,[NAME],[LIMIT_L],[LIMIT_H],[STP],[MOD],[ATT],[DLY],[RSV],[HLD],[LOUT], [C-CH],[RSV],[RSV],[QUICK_KEY],[START_KEY],[RSV],[NUMBER_TAG],[AGC_ANALOG], [AGC_DIGITAL],[P25WAITING][\r] CSP,OK[\r] [SRCH_INDEX] : Index (1-9,0 means 10) [NAME] : Name (max.16char) [LIMIT_L] : Lower Limit Frequency (250000-13000000) [LIMIT_H] : Upper Limit Frequency (250000-13000000) [STP] : Search Step...
Page 507 <COMMAND WXS> Get/Set Weather Settings Controller → Radio WXS[\r] WXS,[DLY],[ATT],[ALT_PRI],[RSV],[AGC_ANALOG],[RSV][\r] Radio → Controller WXS,[DLY],[ATT],[ALT_PRI],[RSV],[AGC_ANALOG],[RSV] [\r] WXS,OK[\r] [DLY] : Delay Time (-10,-5,-2,0,1,2,5,10,30) [ATT] : Attenuation (0:OFF / 1:ON) [ALT_PRI] : Weather Alert Priority (0:OFF / 1:ON) [AGC_ANALOG]: AGC Setting for Analog Audio (0:OFF / 1:ON) Get/Set Weather Priority Settings.
Page 508 <COMMAND TON> Get/Set Tone-Out Settings Controller → Radio TON,[INDEX][\r] TON,[INDEX],[NAME],[FRQ],[MOD],[ATT],[DLY],[ALT],[ALTL],[TONE_A],[RSV], [TONE_B],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV] ,[ALT_COLOR],[ALT_PATTERN],[AGC_ANALOG],[RSV], [RSV] [\r] Radio → Controller TON,[INDEX],[NAME],[FRQ],[MOD],[ATT],[DLY],[ALT],[ALTL],[TONE_A],[RSV], [TONE_B],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV] ,[ALT_COLOR],[ALT_PATTERN],[AGC_ANALOG],[RSV], [RSV] [\r] TON,OK[\r] [INDEX] : Index (1-9,0 means 10) [NAME] : Name (max.16char) [FRQ] : Channel Frequency [MOD] : Modulation (AUTO / FM / NFM) [ATT] : Attenuation...
Page 509 <COMMAND SCN> Get/Set Scanner Option Settings Controller → Radio SCN[\r] SCN,[DISP_MODE],[RSV],[CH_LOG],[G_ATT],[RSV],[P25_LPF][RSV],[RSV],[RSV], [RSV],[RSV], [RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV], [RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV][\r] Radio → Controller SCN,[DISP_MODE],[RSV],[CH_LOG],[G_ATT],[RSV],[P25_LPF],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV], [RSV], [RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV][\r] SCN,OK[\r] [DISP_MODE] : DISPLAY MODE ( 1:MODE1 / 2:MODE2 / 3:MODE3 ) [CH_LOG] : Control Channel Logging ( 0:OFF / 1:ON / 2:Extend ) [G_ATT] : Global attenuator ( 0: OFF / 1: ON )
Page 510 <COMMAND DBC> Get/Set Default Band Coverage Settings Controller → Radio DBC,[BNAD_NO][\r] DBC,[BNAD_NO],[STEP],[MOD][\r] Radio → Controller DBC, [STEP],[MOD] [\r] DBC,OK[\r] [BAND_NO] : Band No (1-31) Band number of band coverage [STP] : Search Step : 5k : 6.25k : 7.5 k : 8.33k 1000 : 10k...
Page 511 <COMMAND BSP> Get/Set Band Scope System Settings Controller → Radio BSP[\r] BSP,[FRQ],[STP],[SPN],[MAX_HOLD][\r] Radio → Controller BSP,[FRQ],[STP],[SPN],[MAX_HOLD][\r] BSP,OK[\r] [FRQ] : Center Frequency [STP] : Search Step : 5k : 6.25k : 7.5 k : 8.33k 1000 : 10k 1250 : 12.5k 1500 : 15k 2000...
Page 512 <COMMAND CIE> Clear IF exchange Frequency Controller → Radio CIE,[FRQ][\r] Radio → Controller CIE,OK[\r] [FRQ] : IF Exchange Frequency (250000-13000000) This command clear Frequency from Global IF exchange Frequency list. This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode. <COMMAND RIE> Register IF exchange Frequency Controller →...
Page 513: Ctcss/Dcs Code List
CTCSS/DCS CODE LIST CTCSS MODE CODE CTCSS 114.8Hz CTCSS 179.9Hz CTCSS 67.0Hz CTCSS 118.8Hz CTCSS 183.5Hz CTCSS 69.3Hz CTCSS 123.0Hz CTCSS 186.2Hz CTCSS 71.9Hz CTCSS 127.3Hz CTCSS 189.9Hz CTCSS 74.4Hz CTCSS 131.8Hz CTCSS 192.8Hz CTCSS 77.0Hz CTCSS 136.5Hz CTCSS 196.6Hz CTCSS 79.7Hz CTCSS 141.3Hz CTCSS 199.5Hz...
Page 514 FONT DATA Character pattern of 8 x 16 dot This character pattern is Large Font. *In this document, characters of these areas are described as normal characters.
Page 520 Character pattern of 8 x 8 dot This character pattern is Small Font.
Page 523 MenuTree < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Menu tree BCD396XT main menu Program System Program Location Srch/CloCall Opt Search for... Close Call Priority Scan WX Operation Tone-Out for... Wired Clone Settings Using the menu To open the menu, tap MENU . Turn the SELECT-VOLUME-SQUELCH knob to move the cursor and highlight menu items.
Page 524 KeysAndTheirFunctions < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Keys and their functions Key Overview Operating the controls Using the FUNCTION button Key functions in different operation modes Locking the Keypad Key Overview The diagram below shows the keys and what they are called throughout the guide: file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...mp/CDImage_090515/Manual/KeysAndTheirFunctions.html (1 of 4)5/26/2009 11:13:48 AM...
Page 525 KeysAndTheirFunctions < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Operating the controls Each button has at least two different actions which you control using the key combinations explained below. Tap : press the button and release it immediately Double tap : press the button twice, as quickly as possible (within 1 second) Press &...
Page 526: Using The Function Button
KeysAndTheirFunctions < UnidenMan4 < TWiki hold the button Using the FUNCTION button When you tap FUNCTION, the scanner remembers the FUNCTION + key combination for the next 3 seconds; during this time, it displays an F icon at the top of the screen. If you want the scanner to maintain the FUNCTION + key combination longer, press &...
Page 527 KeysAndTheirFunctions < UnidenMan4 < TWiki This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...mp/CDImage_090515/Manual/KeysAndTheirFunctions.html (4 of 4)5/26/2009 11:13:48 AM...
Page 528 SettingUpTheHardware < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Setting up the hardware To determine whether the information on this page applies to your scanner, see the tags at the bottom of the page. Setting up the hardware Install the batteries Connect the antenna Attach the belt clip What's included Inside the box you should find:...
Page 529: Install The Batteries
SettingUpTheHardware < UnidenMan4 < TWiki If any of these pieces are missing or damaged, contact customer service immediately. Never used damaged equipment. Install the batteries Your scanner can use either regular alkaline batteries or rechargeable nickel-metal hydryde (NiMH) batteries. The batteries that came with your scanner are rechargeable NiMH. To install the batteries, 1.
Page 530 SettingUpTheHardware < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Place the clip over the post. Slide the clip up into place. To remove the belt clip Rotate the scanner so the scanner is bottom-side up. Then slide the scanner straight up until it comes free from the belt clip. Rotate the scanner 180 degrees.
Page 531 ConnectingAGPSReceiver < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Connecting a GPS receiver To determine whether the information on this page applies to your scanner, see the tags at the bottom of the page. Compatible GPS receivers Configuring your scanner Connecting the receiver Troubleshooting Compatible GPS receivers You can connect your scanner to any GPS receiver that meets the following criteria: Outputs NMEA-0183 v3.01-compliant location data...
Page 532 ConnectingAGPSReceiver < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 1. Connect your GPS receiver to a null modem adapter or cable. 2. Connect the data cable that was supplied with your scanner to the null modem. 3. *The data cable has a DE-9 socket (female) connector. To connect to the data cable, you need a DE-9 plug (male) connector.
Page 533 ConnectingAGPSReceiver < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Make sure the GPS receiver has a lock on the satellites. Check the location configuration for the sites and channel groups in the system. 1. For each site or channel group, go to the Set LocationInfo menu.
Page 534 BCD396XT and BC346XT. For other models see: BCD996XT Tone Out Mode BCT15X Tone Out Mode With the tone out feature, the scanner monitors up to 10 different channels for paging tones (two-tone sequential, single tone, and group tone). Normally, the scanner monitors each of the 10 channels in turn.
Page 535 ToneOutMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Optional Automatic Gain Control ( Set Audio AGC) Delay Time ( Set Delay Time) Alert ( Alert) *digital scanners only Using Tone-Out Mode To start a Tone-Out search: 1. Tap MENU . 2. Scroll down and select Tone-Out for... 3.
Page 536 ToneOutMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Enter Hold mode Enter the number on the key. (the scanner opens squelch). FUNCTION Toggle Close Start the search range assigned to this Search Key. + Tap Call modes. FUNCTION Enter Close Call + Press & Only mode.
Page 537 ToneOutMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki FUNCTION Toggle the + Press & attenuator state hold for all signals. Key Name (2nd operation) Action on: Backlight Yes (Enter, 0 (Weather) No (Decimal, (Power, Lock) GPS) Priority) Turn on the LCD During a system Enter the number Edit the current backlight.
Page 538: Key Operation In Close Call Only Mode
BC346XT. For other models see: BCT15X Close Call Mode BCD996XT Close Call Mode When the scanner is in Close Call mode, it performs a close call check every 2 seconds. The scanner switches to the selected bands and searches for unusually strong signals (indicating the transmitter is probably somewhere close by).
Page 539 CloseCallMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki When the Disable the Close Call band associated with this key. scanner detects a Tap again to enable. Close Call hit: Enter Hold mode. FUNCTION Toggle Close Start the search assigned to this Search Key. + Tap Call mode.
Page 540 CloseCallMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Press & hold Unlock all Close Call and Search frequencies. FUNCTION Review the list Toggle the Change the + Tap of locked out attenuator state modulation. frequencies. for this channel. FUNCTION Toggle the Show the reverse + Press &...
Page 541 CloseCallMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...ments/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/CloseCallMode.html (4 of 4)5/26/2009 11:13:56 AM...
Page 542 BCD396XT and BC346XT. For other models see: BCT15X Band Scope Mode BCD996XT Band Scope Mode Band Scope mode Band Scope mode is a special type of Search mode where the scanner displays the strength of any signal it finds. In a band scope search, the scanner starts at the lowest frequency in the range and moves up the search range.
Page 543 BandScopeMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key operation in Band Scope mode file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...ments/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BandScopeMode.html (2 of 4)5/26/2009 11:13:58 AM...
Page 544 BandScopeMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key Name (2nd operation) Action on: Hold (Close 3 (Search 3) 2 (Search 2) 1 (Search 1) call) Enter Hold mode. FUNCTION Toggle Close Start the search assigned to this Search key. + Tap Call modes. FUNCTION Enter Close Call + Press &...
Page 545 BandScopeMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Press this key to close the setting screen and return to the Normal Screen. FUNCTION Press this key to Toggle the Change the + Tap restart searching. attenuator state modulation. for the current signal. FUNCTION Toggle the + Press &...
Page 546: Main Gps Display
GPSMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki GPS mode This page applies only to the BCD396XT and BC346XT. For other models see: BCD996XT GPS Mode BCT15X GPS Mode You must have a compatible GPS receiver connected! See Also Reading the display in GPS mode...
Page 547: Location Alert Display
GPSMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Location alert display file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/GPSMode.html (2 of 5)5/26/2009 11:14:01 AM...
Page 548: Location Review Display
GPSMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Location review display file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/GPSMode.html (3 of 5)5/26/2009 11:14:01 AM...
Page 549 GPSMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key operation in GPS mode Key Name (2nd operation) Action on: Hold (Close call) 3 (Search 3) 2 (Search 2) 1 (Search 1) Toggle Hold mode on the scan or search running in the background. When reviewing locations: Enter Scan Hold mode.
Page 550 GPSMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Press & hold When reviewing locations: Unlock all locations of the current type (POI, Dangerous Road or Crossing). FUNCTION + When reviewing Press & hold locations: Unlock all locations regardless of type. Key Name (2nd operation) Action on: Backlight (Power, Lock)
Page 551 BC346XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki BC346XT Specs Certified in accordance with FCC Rules and Regulations Part 15 Subpart C as of date of manufacture. (See FCC Information for more details.) FCC ID: AMWUB358 General Frequency Range Special Functions Band Scope Function Two-Tone-Sequential WX Alert Supported trunking systems...
Page 552 BC346XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki GPS/Remote Interface Jack: 4pin Mini Type Internal Speaker 24Ω, 0.8 W Max.(1.26 in.) Power Requirements 3 x AA Size Rechargeable Ni-MH Batteries (1800mAh) 3 x AA Size Alkaline Batteries AC Adapter (6V DC 800mA Regulated) (AD-1001) Operating Nominal: -20°C to +60°C -4°F to +140°F Temperature...
Page 553 BC346XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 0.4•V 76–107.9 MHz 0.3•V 108–136.9916 0.3•V 137–173.9875 0.5•V 174–215.95 MHz 0.3•V 216–224.98 MHz 0.3•V 400–512 MHz 0.4•V 806–960 MHz 0.5•V 1240–1300 MHz Signal Noise Ratio (nominal) 49dB 25–27.995 MHz 43dB 28–53.98 MHz 55dB 54–71.95 MHz 48dB 72–75.995 MHz 60dB...
Page 554 BC346XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 40dB 216–224.98 MHz 39dB 400–512 MHz 42dB 806–960 MHz 38dB 1240–1300 MHz Close Call Sensitivity (nominal): 280•V VHF Low1 Band 130•V VHF Low2 Band 60•V Air Band 60•V VHF High1 Band 100•V UHF Band 220•V 800MHz+ Band Frequency Range Frequency Range...
Page 555 BC346XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 28.0000 - 29.6800 10 Meter Amateur Band 29.7000 - 49.9900 VHF Low Band 50.0000 - 53.9800 6 Meter Amateur Band 54.0000 - 71.9500 VHF TV 72.0000 - 75.9950 Intersystem & Astronomy 76.0000 - 87.9500 VHF TV 88.0000 - 107.9000 FM Broadcast 108.0000 - 136.9916...
Page 556 BC346XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 450.0000 - 469.9875 12.5 UHF Standard Band 470.0000 - 512.0000 12.5 UHF TV 806.0000 - 823.9875 12.5 Public Service Band 849.0125 - 868.9875 12.5 Public Service Band 894.0125 - 960.0000 12.5 Public Service Band 1240.0000 - 1300.0000 25 cm Amateur Band Special Functions Band Scope Function...
Page 557 BC346XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Site: 1000 max (All) 256 per system Channels: 9000 max (20064 memory blocks) Channels per Trunked System: 500 max Heterodyne System 1st IF: 380.7 to 380.8 MHz 2nd IF: 10.8 MHz 3rd IF: 450 kHz CTCSS and DCS Tones CTCSS Tone Frequencies —...
Page 558 BC346XTSpecs < UnidenMan4 < TWiki This page applies to the following scanner(s): BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20...ments/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BC346XTSpecs.html (8 of 8)5/26/2009 11:14:03 AM...
Page 559 The Complete Reference This document provides a complete reference to all menus, functions, and features of the BC346XT Handheld Trunk Tracker Scanner from Uniden. It is based on the Operation Specification that is used both as a guide to the software engineers for creating the scanner’s user interface and as a...
Page 560 Contents Feature Summary ......................8 Band Coverage ......................8 Channels ........................9 Memory Architecture ..................... 9 Channel Memory Scan ....................9 Priority Scan ........................9 Priority Plus Scan ......................9 Search with Scan ......................9 Scan Speed ........................9 Scanning Lockout ......................10 Temporary Lockout .......................
Page 561 Weather and SAME Alert ....................12 ® Close Call Frequency Capture ..................12 Close Call Temporary Store ..................13 Tone-Out Sequential Decode ..................13 Location-Based Scanning* ................... 13 Location Alert System* ....................13 Navigation Modes* ......................13 GPS Compatibility* ....................... 13 Wired Cloning........................
Page 562 Battery Low Tone ......................24 Operation ........................... 25 Power On ........................25 Volume and Squelch Control ..................26 Volume Adjust Mode ....................26 Squelch Adjust Mode ....................26 Menu Mode ........................27 General Operations ....................27 Error Messages ......................30 Top Menu .........................
Page 563 Hold on Conventional System ................. 124 Hold on Trunked System ..................124 Hold on TalkGroup ID from ID Search / ID Scan ............. 125 Direct Entry ......................125 Key Operation During Scan Hold Mode ..............128 PRIORITY SCAN ......................131 Priority Scan ......................
Page 564 WEATHER SCAN MODE ..................... 156 Normal Weather Scan ....................156 Weather Alert Scan ....................156 Weather (Alert) Scan Hold ..................157 Weather Alert Priority (WX Alt Priority) ..............158 Direct Entry / Quick Save ..................158 Key Operation During Weather (Alert) Scan Mode ..........158 Key Operation During Weather (Alert) Scan Hold Mode .........
Page 565 Key Safe Operation ....................188 Key Safe Message ....................188 MEMORY INITIALIZATION ..................189 BATTERY CHARGE ..................... 190 Battery Type Select ....................190 Charging the Battery ....................190 OTHERS ..........................193 AVAILABLE SYSTEM SETTINGS................193 System Settings ....................... 193 System Option Settings ................... 193 Site Settings ......................
Page 566 Feature Summary Band Coverage Frequency (MHz) Modulation Step (kHz) Remark Lower Edge Upper Edge 25.0000 26.9600 Petroleum Products & Broadcast Pickup 26.9650 27.4050 CB Class D Channel 27.4100 27.9950 Business & Forest Products 28.0000 29.6800 20.0 10 Meter Amateur Band 29.7000 49.9900 10.0...
Page 567 Channels Dynamic – You can create up to 9,000 total conventional channels, trunked channels, and trunked system frequencies.  Channels in a conventional system contain a frequency.  Channels in a trunked system contain a talk group ID (TGID). Memory Architecture Absolute Limits: Systems Sites Total...
Page 568 Scanning Lockout You can lock out any System, Site, Channel Group, Channel, or search frequency. Locked out channels are skipped (or ignored) during scanning. If a system, site, or channel group is locked, all channels belonging to it will be skipped during scanning. Temporary Lockout Sites, Systems, Channels, or Frequencies temporarily locked out are automatically unlocked when power is cycled.
Page 569 Multi-Site System All trunked systems can have more than one site. All sites in the system share the same Channel Groups and Channels. Control Channel Only Trunk Tracking can be achieved by entering only the control channels for Motorola systems. Priority ID Scanning Trunked channels can be assigned priority.
Page 570 Search Key Search keys are short cuts to start searching for a single search range. There are 3 search keys (sr1 to sr3). Service Search You can search preset frequencies typically used by specific agencies or groups. The kind of Service Search is as follows: Public Safety, News, HAM Radio, Marine, Railroad, Air, CB Radio, FRS/GMRS/MURS, Racing, FM Broadcast, Special Broadcast Screen Allows the scanner to ignore hits on Pager, FM, UHF TV, VHF TV, NOAA WX and custom band frequencies.
Page 571 Close Call Temporary Store The scanner scans the last 10 frequencies captured by Close Call so that you can continue to receive the signal even after the signal is not strong enough to trigger a Close Call hit.. Tone-Out Sequential Decode Lets you set the scanner to act as a two-tone pager for fire tone-out standby.
Page 572 Battery Low Alert When the battery voltage becomes low, the icon will blink and a Battery Low Tone will be generated every 15 seconds. This alert level is set at the same level as the key beep volume level. Battery Save You can turn on/off this function by Menu Operation.
Page 573 Design The below is a design reference. There might be some differences between this image and the actual final design. Thursday, May 14, 2009...
Page 574 Controls and Keys “Long press” means pressing a key more than 2 second. Each key has a “normal” mode and a “Function” mode. Normal Mode: Normal Mode means that the scanner is not in Function Mode. In this mode, the icon is not displayed.
Page 575 Function + Scan / srch Key  Press to resume searching. (Search Hold Mode and while monitoring in Search Mode)  Press to toggle between ID SCAN and ID SEARCH while scanning a trunked system.  Press to display the Quick Search Prompt. (Except in Search Mode, Search Hold Mode, GPS Mode and Band Scope Mode) ...
Page 576 Function + L/O Key  Press once to temporarily lock out the current system, current site or current search range in Scan Mode and Scan Hold Mode. This lock out is cleared when power is turned off then back on. ...
Page 577 Function + 6 / RIGHT / disp Key  Press to change the Display Mode. (Scan Hold Mode and Custom Search Mode) (Display mode 1 -> Display mode 2 -> Display mode 3 -> Display mode 1 ->….)  Press to change the GPS Display. (GPS Mode) Function + 7 / att (Attenuator) Key ...
Page 578 Menu Key  Press to enter the Menu Mode.  Press to go back up one menu level when in the Menu Mode.  Press after entering the value to indicate going to a number tagged system or channel. Function + Menu Key ...
Page 579 Displays LCD Design The reference design shown below is for illustration purposes only and is not intended to be a photorealistic representation of the display. HOLD L/O PRI ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOP abcdefghi jklmnop C67. 0 S0: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 GRP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Icons Sx: :...
Page 580 SCR: This icon appears when one or more Broadcast Screen Band is set to on. This icon turns on while the Weather Alert Priority Scan works. (Function icon) : This icon appears in Function Mode. Function Mode does not have a timeout when this icon blinks.
Page 581 Tones The scanner can produce 3 fundamental tones, high (1200 Hz), middle (920 Hz), and low (640 Hz). Furthermore, there are Alert Tones and Weather Alert Sirens which include other sounds. Additionally, special alert tones (Location Alert, CC alert, Emergency alert and WX alert, etc) can be set to custom volume levels.
Page 582 Tones in Menu Mode Selecting a menu item As you step to the next menu item by turning [Scroll Control] knob, the scanner will sound a single high beep for 100 ms. However, if the menu item is the last item and you turn [Scroll Control] knob in the clockwise direction, the scanner will sound a double high beep (75 ms beep - 25 ms silent - 75 ms beep).
Page 583 Operation NOTE: Valid keys for the "Press Any Key" prompt are all keys except for [ ]. Pressing [ ] always turns on or off the backlight. And specially, pressing [L/O] cancels the prompt and exit from any Menu and so on immediately. Power On Press [ ] for 1 second to turn on the scanner.
Page 584 Volume and Squelch Control Volume and Squelch can be adjusted by rotating the [Scroll Control] in the following modes: Scan Mode, Scan Hold Mode, Search Mode, Search Hold Mode, Tone-Out Mode, Weather Scan Mode, Close Call Only Mode, Band Scope Mode, Band Scope Hold Mode. Volume Adjust Mode To adjust the volume level, press [Scroll Control].
Page 585 Menu Mode General Operations Key Operation To enter the Menu Mode: Press [Menu] To select a Menu item: Turn [Scroll Control] To select a Menu item or input data: Press [E / yes / gps] or tap the [Scroll Control] To Return to the previous: Press [Menu] To exit from Menu Mode: ...
Page 586 Edit Name The editing cursor is displayed. Turn [Scroll Control] to choose the character and the cursor stays at the highlighted position. Press [4 / LEFT / ifx] to move the cursor to the left and [6 / RIGHT / disp] to move it to the right. Press [.
Page 587 Edit Frequency and Set Tone The editing cursor is displayed. Press a number key to enter each digit and press the decimal key to input a decimal point. The cursor moves to the left or the right by turning [Scroll Control] knob. If you press the decimal key when a decimal point is already entered, the frequency data is cleared and the editing cursor moves to the first position.
Page 588 Hexadecimal TGID edit Turn the [Scroll Control] to select Hexadecimal characters from “0” to “F”, Press [4 / LEFT / ifx] to move the cursor left or press [6 / RIGHT / disp] to move cursor right. Press [E / yes / gps] to set the Hex ID. Note: You can change the TGID format in Set ID Format (DEC/HEX) If you press the decimal key when there are already an acceptable number of hyphens, the TGID is cleared and the editing cursor moves to the first position.
Page 589 Top Menu Press [MENU] key to go to Menu Mode. Top Menu has the following items. Program System Program Location Srch/CloCall Opt Search for... Close Call Priority Scan WX Operation Tone-Out for … Wired Clone Settings Turn the [Scroll Control] to select items and press [E / yes / gps] to go to the selected item. Press [Menu] to exit from Menu Mode.
Page 590 Creating a New System You can create up to 500 systems. To create a new system, select the system type from the following items. Select for any Motorola Type system EDCS Select for EDACS WIDE/NARROW or EDACS SCAT system Select for an LTR system Conventional Select for a non-trunked system.
Page 591 System Settings This menu has the following items. Edit Name Edit Sys Option Edit Site Edit Group Copy System Delete System These setting items are different for each System Type. See System Settings for details of the differences. The first line displays the System name. For example, the following figure shows it is in settings of the System named "System 1 C".
Page 592 Edit Sys Option You can change the following System settings. Set Quick Key Set Startup Key Set Number Tag Set Lockout Set Hold Time ID Scan/Search Set Delay Time Edit Fleet Map Priority ID Scan Set Status Bit Set End Code Emergency Alert Set ID Format (DEC/HEX) Set ID Format (AFS/DEC)
Page 593 Set Number Tag The System Number Tag can be set in this menu. Press a number key to input the number tag. Press [. / no / pri] to clear the input. Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the setting and return to the previous menu. Note: The valid setting range is from 0 to 999.
Page 594 Set Delay Time This setting controls how long the scanner stays on a transmission before resuming scanning. If you select a positive value, the scanner will hold on the channel for that duration after the carrier drops before resuming scanning. If you select a negative value, the scanner will stay on a transmission until the carrier drops or until the selected time elapses, whichever is shortest.
Page 595 Custom On the other hand, if "Custom" is selected, then you are prompted to enter the Fleet Map information. You need to set Size Codes to all Blocks in order. There are 8 Blocks from "Block 0" to "Block 7" and 15 Size Codes from "Size Code 0" to "Size Code 14". In this selection, first Line displays the Block number and after second lines displays the Size Code.
Page 596 Set End Code This setting determines how the scanner treats the transmission end code. The scanner pays attention to the analog transmission end code. Ignore The scanner ignores the transmission end code and waits for carrier drop. Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the selection and return to the previous menu. Emergency Alert The following options can be set in this menu.
Page 597 Set ID Format (AFS/DEC) You can select the format for TGIDs on EDACS WIDE/NARROW systems. AFS Format The scanner uses AFS format for TGIDs. Decimal Format The scanner uses decimal format for TGIDs. Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the entry and return to the previous menu. Rvw ID:Srch L/O Allows you to review TGIDs that are locked out in ID Search or ID Scan.
Page 598 Clr All L/O IDs Selecting this causes the scanner to prompt "Confirm ?" and "Unlock All(Y/N)". Confi rm? Unlock All(Y/N) Press [E / yes / gps] to unlock all TGIDs. Press [. / no / pri] to cancel this selection. The scanner returns to the previous menu.
Page 599 Delete System You can delete the current system and all associated settings by select this menu item. The scanner prompts "Confirm Delete?" to confirm deletion. Press [E / yes / gps] to delete the current system. Press [. / no / pri] to cancel deletion and return to the previous menu. Note: If you confirm to delete the system, all site, all Groups and all Channel data belonging to the System are also deleted.
Page 600 Program Site You can select an existing Site for editing or create a new Site. Site Names that already have been created are displayed as Menu Items. Sites are sorted in the order of the Site Quick Key (See: Set Quick Key) as 1, 2,…,0,11,…99, 90 and not assigned.
Page 601 Edit Name You can name the site. Refer to FONT DATA for the characters that can be entered. Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the name entered. The scanner returns to the previous menu. Set Quick Key This option lets you select which Quick Key will rapidly lock/unlock the site in Scan Mode. Turn [Scroll Control] to select the Site Quick Key.
Page 602 Then press[E / yes / gps]. You are then prompted to set the detailed information of band plan. Set Base Freq Set Offset Set Spacing When you select “Set Base Freq”, you are then prompted to “Input Lower” then “Input Upper”. Use the number keys and decimal key to input frequencies.
Page 603 Set Frequencies You can select a stored frequency or enter a new system frequency. Frequencies already set are displayed as a Menu Item and "New Frequency" is displayed as the last one. For example, if you have stored "851.0125MHz" and "868.9875MHz", the selectable items are as follows: Sel Frequency 851.
Page 604 Valid frequency ranges are in Band Coverage. If the entered frequency is out of range, the scanner sounds an Error Tone and displays "Out of Band". And the scanner stays on this state. If the type of System is EDACS WIDE/NARROW or LTR,the scanner prompts for a LCN (logical channel number).
Page 605 Volume Offset (SCAT systems only) This option is used to set a volume offset for each site frequency. The feature can let you adjust the volume level relative to other channels when the frequency is active. Setting level are: Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the selection and return to the previous menu. Delete Frequency You can delete the current frequency and all associated settings by select this menu item.
Page 606 Set Lockout This option allows you to lock or unlock the current site. When the site is locked out, the scanner does not check it. Unlocked The site is unlocked. Temporary L/O The site is temporarily locked out. Lockout The site is locked out. Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the selection and return to the previous menu.
Page 607 Set Latitude Press the number keys to enter latitude data. Press any number key when the cursor is in the last position to toggle between south latitude (S) and the north latitude (N). Press [E / yes / gps] to accept and return to the previous menu. If “DMS:DDD⁰MM’SS.ss”...
Page 608 Set Range In this menu, the setting unit is determined by the setting in Set Unit. When you select “mile” in Set Unit, the displayed unit will be mile. When you select “km” in Set Unit, the displayed unit will be km. The valid setting range is from 0.5 to 125.0, in 0.5 steps.
Page 609 Program Group This menu lets you select a Channel Group for programming or create a new Channel Group. Names of Groups already created are displayed as Menu Items. The order of Groups is sorted by setting of Quick Key for Groups (See: Set Quick Key ) as 1, 2, 3, ... , 9, 0 and “.” (=Not assigned). The order of Groups belonging to same Quick Key is determined by the assigned order.
Page 610 Set Quick Key This option lets you select which Group Quick Key will rapidly enable/disable the Group when the scanner is in the scanning mode. Allowed settings are from 0 to 9 and not assigned. You can assign more than one Channel Group to the same Quick Key.
Page 611 If “DEG:DDD.dddddd” is selected in Set Pos Format, the display is the following. Set Lati tude 00. 000000 Set Longitude Enter the longitude data using the number keys. Press any number key when the cursor is in the last position to toggle between west longitude (W) and east longitude (E).
Page 612 Set GPS Enable When this option is set to “On”, the scanner will control the L/O status of this channel group using position information supplied from a connected GPS. The Channel Group’s L/O state is automatically controlled by position information. The Channel Group’s L/O state is not influenced by GPS.
Page 613 Program Channel You can select a Channel for programming or add a new Channel. Names of Channels already added are displayed as Menu Items. The order of Channels is sorted by created or pasted order. "New Channel" is displayed as the next to last Channel. "Paste Channel" will be displayed as the last item if a Channel has previously been copied from a compatible (same typed) System / Site.
Page 614 Input TGID: You must enter a TGID. You can input only a TGID in the format suitable for the site type. Motorola Type ID (Decimal Format ID) : When the custom Fleet Map setting for a MOT system is not all Size Code 0 for Blocks, the scanner treats the System as a Motorola Type I.
Page 615 LTR ID : For LTR systems. Press the number keys to enter the Area code, Home repeater and User ID. Note: 6 digit numbers; Area code (0 or 1), Home repeater (01 - 20), User ID (000 - 254) I-Call (Motorola, EDACS) : For any MOT System, EDCS Wide and Narrow System.
Page 616 Channel Settings The following settings are available for channels. Edit Name Edit Frequency Edit TGID Set CTCSS/DCS Set Number Tag Set Modulation Set Attenuator Set Priority Set Alert Set Lockout Volume Offset Copy Channel Delete Channel New Channel The specific settings available depend on the current system type. See Channel Settings for details of the differences.
Page 617 Set CTCSS/DCS You can set the CTCSS/DCS options from the following items for conventional systems. The scanner ignores all tones and opens squelch on any signal. Search The scanner displays any tone being used, but opens squelch on any signal. CTCSS The scanner prompts you for the appropriate setting.
Page 618 Set Attenuator You can attenuate RF reception on the frequency. The frequency will be attenuated. The frequency will not be attenuated. Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the selection and return to the previous menu. Set Priority This option sets the Channel as a Priority Channel. You can set this On for each Channel independently. See PRIORITY SCAN to see how this works for conventional.
Page 619 Set Alert Light You can select whether the scanner should have an alert light when this Channel becomes active*.Alert Light Pattern selections. The alert light will not turn on The alert light is set to on Slow Blink The alert light blinks slowly Fast Blink The alert light blinks fast Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the entry and return to the previous menu.
Page 620 Delete Channel You can delete the current channel and all associated settings by select this menu item. The scanner prompts "Confirm Delete?" to confirm deletion. Press [E / yes / gps] to delete the current channel. Press [. / no / pri] to cancel deletion and return to the previous menu. New Channel Press [E / yes / gps] to create a New Site and go to Channel Settings.
Page 621 Program Location You can select the any Location for programming or create a new Location. First, select the location type to edit or create from the following types: Dangerous Xing Dangerous Road Select an existing location or New Location. For a POI, it goes to POI Settings. For a “Dangerous Xing” or “Dangerous Road”, it goes to Dangerous Xing / Road Settings.
Page 622 Set Type This option can be used to select the location type. Dangerous Xing Dangerous Road Turn [Scroll Control] to select the type and press [E / yes / gps] to accept it. Then the scanner returns to the previous menu. Set Alert Set Alert Tone You can select whether the scanner should sound an Alert Tone when approaching the set Location.
Page 623 Set Alert Light This option can be used to set Alert Light. Alert Light Pattern selections. The alert light will not turn on The alert light is set to on Slow Blink The alert light blinks slowly Fast Blink The alert light blinks fast Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the entry and return to the previous menu.
Page 624 Set Heading This option sets the heading direction-based alerts. The options are: All Range The scanner always sounds an alert and turns on the Alert Light when you go into range of the location. North ( 0º) South (180º) ( 45º) (225º) East ( 90º)
Page 625 New Location If you select this in the “POI” setting menu and press [E / yes / gps], the scanner creates a New POI and goes to POI Settings. Or, if you select this item in “Dangerous Xing” or “Dangerous Road”, the scanner creates a New Dangerous location and goes to Dangerous Xing / Road Settings.
Page 626 Srch/CloCall Opt This menu includes the following: Freq Lockouts Broadcast Screen CTCSS/DCS Search Repeater Find Max Auto Store Set Delay Time Set Attenuator Press [E / yes / gps] to go to each setting. Each setting in these options is applied to some or all Search Modes*. *”Search Mode”...
Page 627 Rvw Search L/O Allows you to review frequencies that are locked out in Search Mode or Close Call Mode. Any frequency in this list will be skipped if encountered in these modes. The first Line displays "Unlock?(Y/N)" and the remaining lines display locked out frequencies. Turn [Scroll Control] to choose frequencies.
Page 628 Set Each Band You can turn on or off each of the following bands. Pager On/Off Various, according to FCC allocation On/Off 88.1000 - 107.9000 MHz UHF TV On/Off 470.0000 - 512.0000 MHz VHF TV On/Off 54.0000 - 72.0000 MHz 76.0000 - 88.0000 MHz 174.0000...
Page 629 Repeater Find This option sets whether the scanner attempts to locate the transmission on a repeater output frequency when it detects a transmission on a common repeater input frequency. The scanner automatically applies repeater reverse to detected transmissions. If the scanner can detect the transmission on the output frequency, it displays "Repeater Found"...
Page 630 Set Delay Time This setting controls how long the scanner stays on frequency after a transmission ends before resuming searching. Turn [Scroll Control] to select the delay time setting from the following list: -10 sec -5 sec -2 sec 0 sec 1 sec 2 sec 5 sec...
Page 631 Search for... This menu includes the following items. Service Search Edit Service Custom Search Edit Custom Search and Store Set Search Key Press [E / yes / gps] to enter each item. Service Search You can select from 12 preset search bands for searching. Public Safety News HAM Radio...
Page 632 Set Delay Time This setting controls how long the scanner stays on frequencies after a transmission ends before resuming searching. Turn [Scroll Control] to select the delay time setting from the following list: -10 sec -5 sec -2 sec 0 sec 1 sec 2 sec 5 sec...
Page 633 Set Number Tag A Number Tag can be set in this menu. Press a number key to input the number tag. Press [. / no / pri] to clear the input. Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the setting and return to the previous menu. Note: The valid setting range is from 0 to 999.
Page 634 Edit Custom You can edit the 10 Custom Search Ranges. Names of Custom Search Ranges are displayed as Menu items. For example, if all names are not changed from default name, selectable items are as follows: Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 10 Select the Name and press [E / yes / gps] to go to Menu of editing Custom settings.
Page 635 Set Delay Time This setting controls how long the scanner stays on frequencies after a transmission ends before resuming searching. Turn [Scroll Control] to select the delay time setting from the following list: -10 sec -5 sec -2 sec 0 sec 1 sec 2 sec 5 sec...
Page 636 Set C-Ch Only These options let you set whether the scanner tracks talk group activity when it detects a Motorola or LTR control channel. This section has the following menus: C-Ch Only Mode Set MOT BandPlan C-Ch Only Mode You can select how the scanner tracks Motorola System and LTR System. (C-Ch means Control Channel.) The scanner only searches for Motorola and LTR Control Channels.
Page 637 Search and Store This function lets the scanner search for new frequencies in Custom Search Ranges or Service Search Ranges, or new TGID's on a trunked System. First, select a System to store the found Channels into. The scanner displays all created Systems. Turn [Scroll Control] to select the System.
Page 638 For Trunked System If a trunked System is selected, you will be asked to select a site. If no site is stored in that system, message “No Site Stored Press Any Key” will be displayed and the scanner will sound an error tone. After the site is selected, the scanner begins searching that System.
Page 639 If the Memory is full, it displays "Memory Full" on the second line and sounds an Error Tone. It does not exit from Search and Store Mode automatically. During "Search and Store" operation or in one of the above-mentioned End State, only the following operations are valid.
Page 640 Close Call This menu has the following items. Close Call Only CC Auto Store Hits with Scan Set CC Mode Set CC Override Set CC Alert Set CC Bands Note: "CC" means "Close Call". Press [E / yes / gps] to enter the menu. Close Call Only When this item is selected at Close Call, the scanner exits from the Menu Mode and goes to the Close Call Only Mode.
Page 641 Set Number Tag Number Tag can be set in this menu. Press a number key to input the number tag. Press [. / no / pri] to clear the input. Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the setting and return to the previous menu. Note: The valid setting range is from 0 to 999.
Page 642 Set CC Override This mode determines how the scanner will behave when a Close Call signal is detected. The scanner alerts (depending on the CC Alert setting) and displays "CC Found!” then immediately jumps to the Close Call frequency. The scanner alerts (depending on the CC Alert setting) and displays "CC Found!" and "Press FUNC Key"...
Page 643 Set Alert Light You can set whether the scanner should have an alert light when it gets a Close Call hit. Alert Light Pattern selections. The alert light will not turn on The alert light is set to on Slow Blink The alert light blinks slowly Fast Blink The alert light blinks fast...
Page 644 Priority Scan You can set following items in this menu. Set Priority Set Interval MaxCHs/Pri-Scan Press [E / yes / gps] to enter each setting. Set Priority This setting controls how the scanner treats Priority Channels. You can select the following items. The scanner provides no special treatment for Priority Channels.
Page 645: Wx Operation
WX Operation This menu lets you set the following items. Weather Scan Weather Alert Program SAME Set Delay Time Set Attenuator WX Alt Priority Select "Weather Scan" and press [E / yes / gps] to start Weather Scan. Select any other and press [E / yes / gps] to enter each setting. Weather Scan When this item is selected at WX Operation, the scanner exits from the Menu Mode and goes to Weather Scan Mode.
Page 646 SAME 1 SAME 2 SAME 3 SAME 4 SAME 5 Select the Name and press [E / yes / gps] to go to Same Group Editing Menu. SAME Group Settings You can set the following items. Edit Name Edit County Press [E / yes / gps] to go to each setting.
Page 647 Turn [Scroll Control] to select the delay time setting from the following list: -10 sec -5 sec -2 sec 0 sec 1 sec 2 sec 5 sec 10 sec 30 sec Then press [E / yes / gps] to accept and return to the previous menu. Set Attenuator You can attenuate RF reception on the frequency.
Page 648: Tone-Out For
Tone-Out for … This menu lets you set the following items. Tone-Out Standby Tone-Out Setup Select “Tone-Out Standby” to start monitoring the Tone-out Frequency. Select “Tone-Out Setup” to go to Tone-Out Setup. Tone-Out Standby When this item is selected at Tone-Out for …, the scanner exits from Menu Mode and goes to Tone-Out standby Mode.
Page 649 Set Frequency You can set the following items. Edit Frequency Set Modulation Set Attenuator Press [E / yes / gps] to go to each setting. Edit Frequency If you select to edit the frequency, the scanner displays the current frequency in edit mode. Press the number keys and [.
Page 650 Set Delay Time This setting controls how long the scanner stays on Mute Off state after a transmission ends. Turn [Scroll Control] to select setting value from: 0 sec 1 sec 2 sec 5 sec 10 sec 30 sec Infinite Then press [E / yes / gps] to accept and return to the previous menu.
Page 651 Set Alert Light You can select whether the scanner should have alert light when a tone-out Channel becomes active*. Alert Light Pattern selections. The alert light will not turn on The alert light is set to on Slow Blink The alert light blinks slowly Fast Blink The alert light blinks fast Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the entry and return to the previous menu.
Page 652: Wired Clone
Wired Clone Connect two BC346XTs and select this menu to copy and override all data from one to another. Master Slave The scanner you set to Master’s data will be copied to the scanner you set to Slave. Then go to Wired Clone Mode.
Page 653: Settings
Settings You can set the following items from this menu. Set Backlight Adjust Key Beep Battery Option Adjust Contrast Set C-CH Output Set GPS Format Set Serial Port Band Defaults See Scanner Info Press [E / yes / gps] to enter each setting. Set Backlight This menu has the following items.
Page 654 Battery Option This menu has the following items. Set Battery Save Set Charge Time Press [E / yes / gps] to enter each setting. Set Battery Save This option can be used to set the battery save feature. Set battery save on Set battery save off Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the selection and return to the previous menu.
Page 655 Set GPS Format You can set the following items for GPS. Set Pos Format Set Time Format Set Time Zone Set Unit Press [E / yes / gps] to go to each setting menu. Set Pos Format The option sets the position format for latitude and longitude. DMS:DDD⁰MM’SS.ss DEG:DDD.dddddd Note: This setting changes all Location Input displays and the GPS Mode display.
Page 656 Set Serial Port You can set the serial port speed from the following items. 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps Press [E / yes / gps] to accept the selection and return to the previous menu. Band Defaults This menu lets you set the default modulation and default step for each band.
Page 657 The following modulation setting values will be shown. set the current band as AM modulation set the current band as NFM modulation set the current band as FM modulation set the current band as WFM modulation set the current band as FMB modulation Turn [Scroll Control] to select the value, press [E / yes / gps] to set the selection and go to the Step Setting menu.
Page 658 Firmware Version When you select this option, the scanner displays the firmware version as "Version #.##.##". And the serial number of the unit is displayed as "SN##############" on the bottom of the screen. Note：The serial number includes 14 digits. Press any key to return to the previous menu. Thursday, May 14, 2009...
Page 659: Display During Scan Mode
SCAN MODE Display during Scan Mode The LCD display in Scan mode is as follows. The first line shows the system, site or search range name while scanning. System 1 SCAN ↑ This shows the scanning direction. S0: 1 2 3 4 * 6 7 8 9 0 These show the one’s place of Quick Key for system or site.
Page 660 While in the Scan Mode, the first line displays currently scanned system, site or search range name and the second line displays "SCAN" (for conventional System) or "ID SCAN", "ID SEARCH" (for trunked System) scrolling from the right to the left, or a search frequency. Disabled Quick Keys are displayed as “*”. The Quick Key for the Current System blinks.
Page 661: Scanning Order
Scanning Order First, systems belonging to Quick Key 1 are scanned. Then systems that belong to Quick Key 2,…,9,0,11,…19,10,21,……,99,90 are scanned in order. Systems with no Quick Key are scanned last. When the scanning of all systems ends, the scanner starts Service Search for any unlocked/enabled searches.
Page 662: Scanning Operation
Scanning Operation Quick Key Operation For Conventional Systems, the SQK is set at the system level. However, for trunked systems, the SQK is set at the site level instead of the system level. In the display, enabled SQKs show their number; disabled SQKs show “*”; SQKs with no system assigned show "-".
Page 663 Scan for Conventional Systems In conventional scanning, the scanner steps through each unlocked channel. If there is activity on the channel, the scanner monitors activity until the transmission ends. While monitoring the transmission, the first line alternates between the current system name and current group name every 1 second.
Page 664 ID Scan : If a TGID matches a TGID stored in an unlocked channel, the scanner goes to the V-Ch and monitors the transmission until it ends. While monitoring a TGID already stored into the Memory, the first line of the display alternates between the current site name and current channel group name every 1 second, and second line displays the current channel name.
Page 665 ID Display Format The scanner displays received ID in the following format on the second line. Normal ID The scanner displays as "ID:xxxx" for no-named TGID. Example) MOT Type I ID ID:101-1 MOT Type II ID:12345 (Decimal Format) ID:123 h (Hexadecimal Format) EDACS ID:01-023...
Page 666 PATCH ID The scanner displays a PATCH list IDs and received PATCH ID as "ID:xx-xxx yy-yyy". (xx-xxx : One of the PATCH list IDs, yy-yyy: received PATCH ID) Example) EDACS PATCH ID: ID:01-012 00-002 MOT Type II: ID:42000 42016 *If the first PATCH list ID is already named, the scanner only displays that ID’s name. PARTIAL ID The scanner displays the wild card portion of a PARTIAL ID as "-"...
Page 667 Trunking Activity Indicators (Display Mode 3) The scanner shows trunking activity when held on the C-Ch. Press [6 / RIGHT / disp] in Function Mode to change the Display Mode in Scan Hold Mode. (See SCAN HOLD MODE.) In EDACS and LTR systems, the order of indicators is the order of LCN. In Motorola systems, it is the order of the frequency programming.
Page 668 Location Based Scanning This operation controls the lockout state for each group or site when the scanner is connected to a GPS unit. This works automatically based on the location data from GPS when the feature is set to “On” in Set GPS Enable.
Page 669 Control Channel Data Stream Output The scanner can output the data stream on the control channel. You can turn on this feature in the menu Set C-CH Output. When it is active, the scanner will output the data stream whenever it is receiving a control channel.
Page 670 [LTR System] LTR,<A>-<GG>-<HH>-<III>-<FF> <A> = Area Number (0 or 1) <GG> = Goto Repeater Number (Hex 2 digits, 5 bits) <HH> = Home Repeater Number (Hex 2 digits, 5 bits) <III> = ID Number (Hex 2 digits, 8 bits) <FF> = Free Repeater Number (Hex 2 digits, 5 bits) For example: LTR,0-01-01-FA-02 [MOT Subaudio]...
Page 671 For Motorola system: Decoded Description Remark ,CNM TG-tttt CH-ccc VC-ffffffff Call for Talk Group tttt = Talk Group ID (Hex 4 digits, 16 bits) ccc = LCN (Hex 3 digits, 10 bits) ffffffff = Frequency (BCD 8 digits) ,CIP TG-tttt CH-ccc VC-ffffffff Call for ICALL tttt = Talk Group ID (Hex 4 digits, 16 bits) ccc = LCN (Hex 3 digits, 10 bits)
Page 672 For EDACS system: Decoded Description Remark ,CNM TG-ttt CH-cc VC-ffffffff Call for Talk Group ttt = Talk Group ID (Hex 3 digits, 11 bits) cc = LCN (Hex 2 digits, 5 bits) ffffffff = frequency (BCD 8 digits) ,CIP TG-tttt CH-cc VC-ffffffff Call for ICALL tttt = Unit ID (Hex 4 digits, 14 bits) cc = LCN (Hex 2 digits, 5 bits)
Page 673: Temporary System Hold
Temporary System Hold *For trunked systems, “system” should be read as “site” in this section. **In Temporary System Hold state, Priority Scan and Close Call function are not performed. The scanner scans only one system while displaying icon by pressing [FUNC] Key. This state is called "Temporary System Hold".
Page 674: System Hold
System Hold Long press [Hold / ] to goes to the System Hold Mode. While on System Hold, the scanner scans only one system and the scanner flashes the HOLD icon. HOLD System 1 Scan ↑ S0: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 GRP 1 2 3 - - - 7 - - - Long press [Hold / ] key to resume full system scan, and other keys will work normally.
Page 675: Quick Save For Ctcss/Dcs Data
System Select in Scan Hold Mode When you go to Quick Select System from Scan Hold Mode and exit from this state, the scanner holds on the first channel of the selected system. If you select a locked out system, the locked state for the selected system is not changed. Quick Save for CTCSS/DCS Data When CTCSS/DCS search is set for a conventional channel and the scanner is detecting a CTCSS/DCS tone data, you can store the tone data into the current channel by pressing [E / yes / gps].
Page 676: Key Operation During Scan
Key Operation During Scan Normal Mode [Scroll Control] knob Turn this knob to resume scanning while monitoring. Turn this knob to change the scan direction. If the scanner is scanning system scan, service search, then custom search turn this knob counterclockwise to scan custom search, service search, then system scan. [Scan / srch] key Press this key to resume scanning while monitoring.
Page 677 F+[Scan / srch] key If the current system is a conventional system or search range: ・ Press this key to display the prompt for starting Quick Search. ・ Press [E / yes / gps] to start Quick Search. ・ Press [. / no / pri] to go to Search for..・...
Page 678: Scan Hold Mode
SCAN HOLD MODE Press [Hold / ] in Scan Mode to go to Scan Hold Mode. Display while in Scan Hold Mode The display in Scan Hold mode is as follows. HOLD System 1 This shows a channel name or a frequency. Channel A C67.
Page 679 HOLD T001. 001 Channel number tag Group 1 Channel A System number tag I FX V - 3 Volume level S0: 1 - - - - - - - - - GRP - - - 4 - - - - - - IFX (IF Exchange) Press [6 / RIGHT / disp] in Function Mode to change the Display Mode.
Page 680 Hold on a Channel (TGID) in Trunked System: *If there are two or more sites in the system, the same TGIDs will appear in every site. The scanner checks the current site for the selected TGID. When you hold on a channel in a trunked system and a C-Ch exists, the scanner displays as follows. If the TGID you are holding on is stored into the system, first line alternately displays the site name and channel group name.
Page 681 For example, "ID:0-01-063" for the LTR System displays in Channel Name Display Mode 2. HOLD HOLD System 3 System 3 I D: 0- 01- 063 I D: 0- 01- 063 512. 0000 0 - 0 1 - 0 6 3 S0: 1 - - - - - - - - - S0: 1 - - - - - - - - - GRP - - - - - - - - - -...
Page 682: Hold On Conventional System
For a system other than an EDACS SCAT System, the scanner monitors the received signal on the C-Ch or V- *For EDACS SCAT Systems, the scanner only monitors Voice Data. It always the displays system name on the first line and the trunk frequency on the second line. Hold on Search Frequency: The scanner displays the Search Range Name on the first line and the held frequency on the second line.
Page 683: Hold On Talkgroup Id From Id Search / Id Scan
Hold on TalkGroup ID from ID Search / ID Scan The scanner monitors the held TGID continuously. While monitoring a TGID already stored into Memory, the first line displays alternates between the current site name and the current group name, and the second line displays the current channel name. Also, the SQK and GQK numbers for the current monitoring site and channel group appears.
Page 684 Store TGID To quickly store a TGID into a channel, enter the TGID using the number and decimal keys. Press the decimal key twice to enter a hyphen. If you press the decimal key first or at the left end, it will be entered as "i"...
Page 685 Direct Access Use this feature to quickly access a channel with number tags. System or channel number tags can be set in the menu. However if you set a channel number tag that already exists in the same system, or if you set a system tag that already exists in another system (include scan systems, service search with scan systems, custom search with scan systems, CC Hits with scan systems), a warning message will be displayed “No.Tag Exists Accept? (Y/N)”.
Page 686: Key Operation During Scan Hold Mode
Key Operation During Scan Hold Mode Normal Mode [Scroll Control] knob Turn this knob to select the channel. [Scan / srch] key Press this key to resume scanning. [Hold / ] key Press this key to resume scanning. Long press this key to activate System Hold Mode and resume scanning. [L/O] key Press this key once to temporarily lock out the held frequency or TGID.
Page 687 [FUNC] key Press this key to go to Function Mode with a 3-second timeout. The scanner displays the system number tag and channel number tag. If you do not press a key within 3 seconds, function mode is automatically cancelled. Long press this key to go to Function Mode without a timeout.
Page 688 [4 / LEFT / ifx] key Press this key to exchange the IF(intermediate frequency) for receiving radio signals to avoid interference. [5 / lvl ] key Press this key to change the volume offset level. [6 / RIGHT / disp] key Press this key to change the Display Mode.
Page 689: Priority Scan
PRIORITY SCAN There are two kinds of Priority Scan. (See: Set Priority) Refer to Set Priority for setting Priority Channels. Priority Scan This works in Scan Mode or Scan Hold Mode when the Priority Scan setting is on. In this condition, " PRI" icon appears.
Page 690: Priority Plus Scan
Priority Plus Scan This works in Scan Mode or Scan Hold Mode when the setting of Priority Scan is Plus On. In this condition, the "PRI" icon blinks and the scanner scans only Priority Channels. System 1 SCAN ↑ S0: 1 2 * * 5 * 7 8 * 0 GRP 1 2 - - - 6 - - - 0 If there is no Priority Channel or all Priority Channels are locked out, the scanner displays "Priority Scan No Channel"...
Page 691: Priority Id Scan
PRIORITY ID SCAN Refer to Set Priority to set Priority Channels. Refer to Priority ID Scan for activation of Priority ID Scan. Priority ID Scan Priority ID Scan works in ID Scan/Search Mode or ID Scan/Search Hold Mode when the Priority ID Scan setting is on.
Page 692: Search Mode
SEARCH MODE The scanner has Service Search, Custom Search and Quick Search in Search Mode. Display during Search Mode The LCD display in Search mode is as follows. Custom 1 This shows a search range name. 50. 0000MHz ↑ This shows the searching direction. NFM ATT C67.
Page 693: Service Search
Service Search You can search one of the pre-programmed search ranges. Publi c Safety 30. 8600MHz ↑ The Scanner starts from the lowest frequency of the selected range and searches in ascending or descending order. While searching, turn [Scroll Control] to change the searching direction. If the scanner finds a transmission, it stops on the frequency and the second line displays the frequency and the unit “MHz”.
Page 694: Custom Search
Custom Search Custom search can start by selecting Custom Search. When performing a custom search, you can turn on or off custom ranges by pressing the [0 - 9] keys. You cannot turn off the last Custom Range. If you try, the scanner sounds an Error Tone. The scanner only searches turned on custom ranges.
Page 695: Custom Search In Control Channel Only Mode
Custom Search Range Select : You can select the range by turning [Scroll Control] in Function Mode. When the scanner returns to Normal Mode, it searches from the selected range. If you select a range that is turned off, the scanner turns on the range and starts searching from the range. Custom Search in Control Channel Only Mode This is valid only for Custom ranges that have the C-CH Only setting turned on at Set C-Ch Only.
Page 696: Search And Store
Receive LTR Control Channel: The scanner displays “LT System” and TGID. The scanner toggles the following display while receiving it. Custom 1 LT System I D: 0- 01- 001 I D: 0- 01- 001 851. 0125 851. 0125 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Key Operation : Turn [Scroll Control] to resume Frequency Search.
Page 697 Quick Search for frequency The scanner searches from the current channel frequency when the Quick Search starts from monitoring / holding in conventional systems, Close Call Mode, Weather Scan Mode and Tone-Out Mode. The range of this searching is all ranges of the scanner. Turn [Scroll Control] to change the searching direction.
Page 698: Key Operation During Search Mode
Key Operation During Search Mode Normal Mode [Scroll Control] knob Turn this knob to change the searching direction. While monitoring a frequency, turn this knob to resume searching. [SCAN / srch] key Press this key to go to Scan Mode. [Hold / ] key Press this key to go to Search Hold Mode.
Page 699 [1 - 3 / sr 1 - 3] key Press this key to start searching the search range set at Set Search Key. [4 / LEFT / ifx] Key While monitoring a frequency, press this key to exchange IF(intermediate frequency). [6 / RIGHT / disp] Key Press this key to change the system ID display and system ID name display in custom search if C-Ch Only Mode is on.
Page 700: Search Hold Mode
SEARCH HOLD MODE Press [Hold / ] in Search Mode to go to Search Hold Mode and the scanner holds on the current frequency. General Operation The scanner monitors the frequency continuously. The scanner displays the search range name on the first line.
Page 701: Quick Save
Quick Save Press [E / yes / gps] without entering data to quickly store the held frequency. This Quick Save function is almost the same as Direct Entry. (See: Direct Entry for details.) The name of the stored frequency is the frequency when the scanner is not receiving location data from a GPS unit.
Page 702: Key Operation During Search Hold Mode
Key Operation During Search Hold Mode Normal Mode [Scroll Control] knob Turn this knob to change the searching direction. While monitoring a frequency, turn this knob to resume searching. [SCAN / srch] key Press this key to go to Scan Mode. [Hold / ] key Press this key to resume searching.
Page 703 [L/O] key Press this key to go to Rvw Search L/O. [1 - 3 / sr 1 - 3] key Press this key to start searching the search range set at Set Search Key. [4 / LEFT / ifx] Key Press this key to exchange IF(intermediate frequency) for the current frequency.
Page 704: Close Call Mode
CLOSE CALL MODE The basic Close Call feature allows the scanner to immediately lock onto a transmission above a threshold signal strength. The way the scanner treats a Close Call is based on settings of the menu at Srch/CloCall Opt and Close Call. Display during Close Call Mode CC Found! Press Any Key...
Page 705 Press [Hold / ] to go to Close Call Hold Mode on the frequency. If the scanner gets a Close Call hit in GPS Mode, it displays “Press FUNC Key” on the 4th line. 1h 10m 15. 03 mi HOME Press FUNC Key You can listen to the detected frequency by pressing [FUNC] or [Hold / CC Override is Off:...
Page 706 Monitoring Close Call Transmission: While monitoring a Close Call transmission, the scanner displays "Close Call" on the first line and the frequency on the second line. The modulation is displayed and the Close Call icon blinks. If Attenuation, Broadcast Screen or Repeater Find for Srch/CloCall Opt are on, each icon is displayed. For example, if the scanner finds a transmission on 462.7125 MHz, it displays as follows.
Page 707: Close Call Only
Close Call Only The scanner performs this by menu at Close Call Only. Or, long press [Hold / ] in function mode to perform this quickly. The scanner only tries to find a Close Call transmission. “Close Call” will be displayed on the first line and the Close Call meter is displayed in the second line. This meter indicates the transmission signal level of each band.
Page 708: Close Call Hold
Monitoring Close Call Transmission: In this monitoring state, the scanner does not check other Close Call transmissions. Press [Hold / while monitoring the hit to go to Close Call Hold. While the scanner is monitoring the transmission, turn [Scroll Control] to resume Close Call. If all the bands are Off at Set CC Bands, the scanner cannot check for Close Call hits.
Page 709: Cc Hit With Scan
If the scanner finds a Close Call transmission, it displays "CC Found!" on the first line. Then it performs duplication check in the "Close Call" System and displays "Memory Check" on the first line. While storing the frequency to Memory, it displays "Storing" on the first line. The scanner will stop storing if the number of found frequencies reaches Max Auto Store.
Page 710: Key Operation During Close Call Only Mode
When the scanner monitors or holds on a Close Call transmission, press [E / yes / gps] to quickly store the current frequency. While monitoring a Close Call frequency, if you turn [Scroll Control], the scanner goes to Quick Search Hold Mode with the frequency.
Page 711: Key Operation During Close Call Hold Mode
[Hold / ] key Press this key to set the Close Call Mode to off and go to Scan Mode. [L/O] key Press this key to go to Rvw Search L/O. [1 - 3 / sr 1 - 3] key Press this key to start searching the search range set at Set Search Key.
Page 712 [L/O] key Press this key to temporarily lock out the current frequency. When the scanner is turned off, the frequency is unlocked. Press this key twice in a second to permanently lock out the current frequency. When the scanner is turned off, the frequency stays locked.
Page 713 [9 / mod] Key Press this key to change the modulation mode. [0 / WX] key Press this key to change WX Alert Priority Mode. Long press this key to start WX Scan. [E / yes / gps] key Press this key to change to the GPS Mode. [Menu] key Press this key to go to Close Call Thursday, May 14, 2009...
Page 714: Weather Scan Mode
WEATHER SCAN MODE You can start scanning the 10 Weather Channels either by using the menu or by pressing Function and long pressing [0 / WX]. The scanner scans the 10 Weather Channels normally, or alerts when a 1050 Hz Weather Alert Tone or a SAME Weather Alert is broadcast on a Weather Channel.
Page 715: Weather (Alert) Scan Hold
Warni ng WX Alert If the scanner is set to one of the SAME Groups, the scanner attempts to decode the SAME data packets that precede the Alert Tone. Then the scanner sounds a Weather Alert Siren (for Warning, Watch or Advisory) when the received County is the same as the programmed data.
Page 716: Weather Alert Priority (Wx Alt Priority)
The scanner does not sound until it detects the 1050 Hz Weather Alert Tone or decodes the SAME data in Weather Alert Scan Hold. See: Weather Alert Scan for operation when it detects the1050 Hz Weather Alert Tone or decodes the SAME data. Press [Hold / ] again to return to Weather (Alert) Scan.
Page 717: Key Operation During Weather (Alert) Scan Hold Mode
Function Mode [SCAN / srch] key Press this key to display the prompt for starting Quick Search. The scanner displays the prompt. Press [E / yes / gps] to start Quick Search, press [. / no / pri] to go to Menu Mode at Search for..., press [L/O] to cancel the prompt or press [Hold / ] to go to Quick Search Hold Mode.
Page 718 [E / yes / gps] key Press this key to quickly store the current frequency. [MENU] key Press this key to go to the Menu Mode at Top Menu. Function Mode [SCAN / srch] key Press to display the Quick Search prompt. Press [E / yes / gps] to start Quick Search, press [. / no / pri] to go to Search for..., press [L/O] to cancel the prompt or press [Hold / ] to go to Quick Search Hold.
Page 719: Tone-Out Mode
TONE-OUT MODE Select “Tone-Out Standby” in Tone-Out for … Note: In this function, Close Call and WX Priority don't operate. Display during Tone-Out Mode Tone-Out Standby This shows Tone-Out Standby Status. Tone- Out Standby This shows Tone-Out channel name. Tone- Out 1 I FX CH1 This shows Tone-Out channel number.
Page 720: Tone-Out Standby Mode
Tone-Out Standby Mode If at least one of Tone A and Tone B have a programmed tone, the scanner goes to Tone-Out Standby. While monitoring the Tone-Out frequency, the speaker is muted until matching Tones are detected.  For two-tone pages, enter a value for Tone A and Tone B. ...
Page 721 Multi-Channel Monitoring The scanner can check multiple tone combination for channels that have the same settings for frequency, Modulation and Attenuator. For example, the scanner can check tone combination from CH 1 to CH3 at the same time when you program the scanner with the following settings.
Page 722: Tone-Out Search Mode
Tone-Out Search Mode When both Tone A and Tone B are set to 0.0Hz, this channel will be treated as a Tone-Out Search channel. The scanner starts the Tone-Out Search. During monitoring the Tone-Out frequency, the speaker is muted until Tones are detected. In Tone-Out Search mode, if a transmission is detected, the scanner starts to check for two-tone pages, single-tone pages and group tones.
Page 723: Tone-Out Hold Mode
Tone-Out Hold Mode You can hear the transmission in Hold Mode. When the transmission ends and the delay time expires, the scanner returns to standby condition or search condition. Or pressing [Hold / ] also returns to standby condition or search condition. You can change to Hold Mode from Standby Mode of Search Mode by pressing [Hold / ].
Page 724: Key Operation During Tone-Out Mode
Key Operation During Tone-Out Mode Normal Mode [Scroll Control] Knob Turn this knob to change the channel. Then the scanner is muted if it releases the mute. [Scan / srch] key Press this key to go to Scan Mode. [Hold / ] Key In Tone-Out Standby Mode or Tone-Out Search Mode, press this key to go to Tone-Out Hold Mode and release the mute.
Page 725 Function Mode [Scan / srch] key Press this key to display the prompt for starting Quick Search. The scanner displays the prompt. Press [E / yes / gps] to start Quick Search, press [. / no / pri] to go to Menu Mode at Search for..., press [L/O] to cancel the prompt or press [Hold / ] to go to Quick Search Hold Mode.
Page 726: Gps Mode
GPS MODE By connecting a GPS Unit, the scanner can operate the following functions.  Automatic lockout control for Scan Systems, Sites, and Channel Groups  Navigation to POI (Point Of Interest)  Location Alerts This mode guides to the destination by connecting a GPS Unit to the serial port of the scanner and receiving location data through it.
Page 727 Examples of each Display Mode are as follows. SW 01: 23P SW 1h 10m SW 13: 23 39 mph 544 ft 15. 03 mi 15. 03 mi HOME HOME ↑ ↑ ↑ SCAN SCAN SCAN GPS DATA Display ETA Display Clock Display N 32 ”...
Page 728: Location Alert Operation
Display Formats of Each Information: The advance direction: This is one of N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW. The time: The time is displayed as "hh:mm" (hh: hour, mm: minute). If "12H" is selected at Set Time Format, "A" or "P" is displayed at a right end. The speed: This is a triple digits.
Page 729 Display with Location Alert This shows Location Alert System Type. ALERT for Road 0. 500mi This shows that the scanner is in Location Alert. R183 at Beltli ne This shows the distance to Location Alert. ↑ SCAN This shows Location Alert name. This shows the direction of Location Alert.
Page 730 The scanner alerts only once for each range when it meets both of the following two conditions.  First condition is heading for Alert Point. This is cleared when you heading is within ±45˚ of the value that is set in Set Heading. ...
Page 731 Priority for Location Alert When a Location Alert with a higher priority occurs during a Location Alert, the current Location Alert is canceled and the scanner alerts for the Location with the high priority. The priority order is as follows: Dangerous Road Dangerous Xing Point of Interest...
Page 732 Review Location Mode *In this mode, scanning/searching operation, navigation and Location Alert operation are invalid. You can review all created Locations. In GPS Mode, press [E / yes / gps] to go to Review Location Mode. At first, the last displayed Location is selected. The first line displays "Review Location"...
Page 733 If you press [E / yes / gps], the scanner unlocks all locations of the current Type. If you press [. / no / pri], the scanner returns to the previous mode without unlocking. Long press [L/O] in Function Mode: Display the prompt "Unlock All Locations?"...
Page 734: Key Operation During Gps Mode
Key Operation During GPS Mode *Refer to Review Location Mode for Key Operation of Review Location Mode. Normal Mode [Scroll Control] knob Turn this knob to select a POI. While displaying the icon, the location alert arrow changes to a small font. Turn this knob during a location alert to temporarily lockout the displayed Location Alert.
Page 735 Function Mode [Scroll Control] knob Turn this knob to skip to the location that starts with the next alphabetic character. Press this knob to go to Normal Mode. [L/O] key Press this key once to temporarily lockout the current Location Alert during a Location Alert. When the scanner is turned off, the frequency is unlocked.
Page 736: 0Band Scope Mode
0BAND SCOPE MODE Band Scope Mode searches a frequency range and displays the signal level in real time. You can set the center frequency and span of the frequency range. In Hold Mode, you can monitor the displayed frequency. *Close Call, Priority Scan, Weather Scan and GPS functions do not work in Band Scope Mode. Scope Mode HOLD 850.
Page 737: Search Mode
Search Mode The scanner searches and displays the signals of the frequency range in real time. The scanner displays "SRCH". The frequency range expressed in 32 bars is determined by the center frequency and span. If the frequency range includes outside of the range from 25.0000 to 1300.0000 MHz, the scanner does not search that range.
Page 738: General Operation
General Operation Normal Screen This screen is usually displayed in Band Scope Mode. This screen displays the start and end frequency of the range on the bottom line. You can control the marker to monitor a frequency in Hold Mode and register the marker frequency as the center frequency.
Page 739: Search Setting Parameters
Search Setting Parameters Center Frequency This parameter is the center frequency of the search range. *Please see: Band Coverage for acceptable frequencies. When you go to Band Scope Mode from another mode with a frequency, the scanner sets that frequency as the center frequency.
Page 740: Key Operation During Band Scope Mode
Key Operation during Band Scope Mode Normal Mode during Normal Screen [Scroll Control] Knob Sets the level in Volume / Squelch Level Control mode. Turn this knob, the marker changes the frequency every step. [Scan / srch] Key Press this key to go to Scan Mode. [Hold / ] Key In Search or Max Hold Search Mode, press this key to go to Hold Mode.
Page 741 Function Mode [Scroll Control] Knob Sets the level in Volume / Squelch Level Control mode. Turn this knob, the marker changes the frequency every bar. [Scan / srch] Key Press this key in Search Mode to go to Max Hold Search Mode. Press this key in Max Hold Search Mode to go to Search Mode.
Page 742: Wired Clone Mode
WIRED CLONE MODE You can clone almost all the data of one scanner to another. After connecting the two scanners, turn on the two scanners. Then select "Master" or "Slave" Wired Clone. Confirm State First, you select Master or Slave. Clone Master Clone Slave Press SCAN Key...
Page 743: Error State
When you reboot the Slave Unit, it is has the new cloned data. Note: When you reboots the Slave Unit, the Unit will check and erase the protected systems first, this process may take a few minutes which depend on the how many protected systems there are. Error State If the data transfer is not successful, the "Error"...
Page 744: Keylock
KEYLOCK Press [Func] + [ ] to lock or unlock the keypad. If you change this setting, the scanner displays "Keypad Lock" and "On" or "Off". Keypad Lock Keypad Lock While the keypad is locked, any key operation other than [Hold / ],[Func] and turning [Scroll Control] key are invalid.
Page 745: Key Safe Mode
KEY SAFE MODE This mode prevents accidentally changing parameter or modes. This mode is for handing the scanner to someone unfamiliar with its operation. Some keys don't work in this mode. Changed Key Operation in Key Safe Mode The key in which a setting is applied showed in the following table. Service Custom Quick...
Page 746: Key Safe Operation
Key Safe Operation Turns on power while pressing and holding [FUNC] key to go to the LAST MODE* in Key Safe Mode. The scanner displays the “Key Safe Mode On” message after displaying the copyright message. In Key Safe Mode, the on power supply while pressing and holding [FUNC] key to return to LAST MODE* in Full Operation.
Page 747: Memory Initialization
MEMORY INITIALIZATION Press and hold [2 / sr 2], [9 / mod] and [Hold / ] and turn on the scanner to initialize the Memory and be able to restore the Preprogram list. The scanner clears all data and returns to initial setting. The display is as follows. All Memory Clear Please Wai t *If you unplug the AC Adapter or turn off the scanner during initialization, the scanner starts initializing...
Page 748: Battery Charge
BATTERY CHARGE Battery Type Select You can power the scanner non-rechargeable batteries (not supplied), nickel metal hydride (Ni-MH) rechargeable batteries or AC adapter. You need to select the battery type before using batteries. Turn off the scanner and remove the battery compartment cover. There is a switch to select the battery type like the following figure.
Page 749 The scanner displays "Pre-Charging". "Pre-Charging" is a transition to the beginning of “Normal Charging”. Pre- Chargi ng When the charge time elapses, it displays “Charge Complete”. Charge Complete If a battery is not installed, it displays “No Battery”. No Battery If the scanner detects that the battery cannot be charged, it displays “Battery Error”.
Page 750 When the scanner is turned on: If the battery is good, the scanner charges the battery and it operates ordinarily. When the scanner cannot judge the battery to be a good one at once, the scanner checks the battery and the battery icon is displayed. If the scanner judges the battery good, the scanner starts charging and the battery icon disappears.
Page 751: Others
OTHERS AVAILABLE SYSTEM SETTINGS Different types of systems and sites have different settings available. *In the following table, "CNV" means Conventional System. System Settings EDACS System Settings CNV* WIDE / SCAT NARROW Edit Name Edit Sys Option Edit Site Edit Group Copy System Delete System System Option Settings...
Page 752: Site Settings
Site Settings EDACS Site Setting WIDE / SCAT NARROW Edit Name Set Quick Key Set Startup Key Edit Band Plan Set Site Type Set Frequencies Set Modulation Set Attenuator Set Lockout Set Hold Time Set LocationInfo Delete Site New Site Site Frequency Settings EDACS Site Frequency...
Page 753 Channel Settings EDACS Channel Settings CNV* WIDE / SCAT NARROW Edit Name Edit Frequency Edit TGID Set CTCSS/DCS Set Number tag Set Modulation Set Attenuator Set Priority Set Alert Set Lockout Volume Offset Copy Channel Delete Channel New Channel...
Page 754: Tgid Format For Trunked System
TGID FORMAT FOR TRUNKED SYSTEM [ MOTOROLA TYPE1 SYSTEM ] Display Format 1) BFF-SS Normal ID B is 1 digit FF is 2 digits (0 filling) SS is 1-2 digit(s) 2) BFFF-S Normal ID (when FLEET is 100-127) B is 1 digit FFF is 3 digits S is 1 digit 3) B-----...
Page 755 Range : BLOCK (0-7) FF(F) : FLEET S(S) : SUB-FLEET FLEET and SUB-FLEET maximum numbers depend on the SIZE CODE of each BLOCK in FLEET-MAP setting. SIZE CODE 0:BLOCK0 : NNNNN ( 0- 8191) BLOCK1 : NNNNN ( 8192-16383) BLOCK2 : NNNNN (16384-24575) BLOCK3 : NNNNN (24576-32767) BLOCK4 : NNNNN (32768-40959) BLOCK5 : NNNNN (40960-49151)
Page 756 [ MOTOROLA TYPE2 SYSTEM ] <Decimal Format> Display Format 1) NNNNN Normal ID NNNNN is 1-5 digit(s) 2) iNNNNN I-CALL ID NNNNN is 5 digits (0 filling) Input Format 1) NNNNN Normal ID NNNNN is 1-5 digit(s) 2) iNNNNN I-CALL ID NNNNN is 1-5 digits.
Page 757 [ EDACS SYSTEM ] <AFS format> Display Format 1) AA-FFS Normal ID AA is 2 digits (0 filling) FF is 2 digits (0 filling) S is 1 digit 2) AA---- Partial ID (free FLEET and SUB-FLEET) AA is 2 digits (0 filling) 3) AA-FF- Partial ID (free SUB-FLEET) AA is 2 digits (0 filling)
Page 758 <Decimal format> Display Format 1) NNNN Normal ID NNNN is 1-4 digit(s) (no 0 filling) 2) iNNNNN I-CALL ID NNNNN is 5 digits (0 filling) Input Format 1) NNNN Normal ID NNNN is 1-4 digit(s) 2) iNNNNN I-CALL ID NNNNN is 1-5 digit(s) Range Normal ID : 1-2047 I-CALL ID : i00000-i16383...
Page 759 [ LTR SYSTEM ] Display Format 1) A-RR-NNN Normal ID A is 1 digit RR is 2 digits NNN is 3 digits 2) A-RR---- Partial ID A is 1 digit RR is 2 digits Input Format 1) A-RR-NNN Normal ID A is 1 digit RR is 2 digits NNN is 3 digits...
Page 760: Fleet Map
FLEET MAP The range of TGIDs is from 0 to 65535. This range is split into 8 equal blocks, and each Block is set to one of 15 Size Codes. The range of TGID 0 - 65535 Block 0 0 - 8191 Block 1 8192 - 16383 Block 2...
Page 761 Details of each Size Code are as follows. Size Code Fleet-SubFleet-ID Number of Blocks occupied (as Type II ID) 128-4-16 16-8-64 8-8-128 1-16-512 64-4-32 32-8-32 32-4-64 16-4-128 8-4-256 4-8-256 2-16-256 1-16-1024 1-16-2048 1-16-4096 *The numbers of "Fleet-SubFleet-ID" means the number of each. If the number of Fleets is 4, there are 4 Fleets and the range is from 0 to 3.
Page 762: Weather Channels
WEATHER CHANNELS The modulation for all Weather Channels is FM. CH No. Frequency 162.5500 MHz 162.4000 MHz 162.4750 MHz 162.4250 MHz 162.4500 MHz 162.5000 MHz 162.5250 MHz 161.6500 MHz 161.7750 MHz 163.2750 MHz CTCSS FREQUENCY The scanner can detect the following 50 CTCSS frequencies. 67.0Hz 88.5Hz 114.8Hz...
Page 763: Cea2009-Same Event Code(Ansi/Cea-2009-A October 2005)
CEA2009-SAME EVENT CODE(ANSI/CEA-2009-A October 2005) Standard Event Code EVENT LEVEL LCD Display Warning Watch Advisory Administrative Message Admin Message Avalanche Watch Avalanche Avalanche Warning Avalanche Biological Hazard Warning Biological Boil Water Warning Boil Water Blizzard Warning Blizzard Child Abduction Emergency Child Emergency Civil Danger Warning Civil Danger...
Page 764 Iceberg Warning Iceberg Industrial Fire Warning Industrial Fire Local Area Emergency Local EMG Law Enforcement Warning Law Enforcement Land Slide Warning Land Slide National Audible Test National Audible National Information Center National Info Network Notification Message Network Message National Periodic Test Nation Period National Silent Test Nation Silent...
Page 765: Remote Command
REMOTE COMMAND 【 Remote Communication Format 】 BPS rate : 4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200 bps Start/Stop bit : 1 bit, 1 bit Data Length : 8 bit Parity Check : None Code : ASCII Flow Control : None Return Code : Carriage Return only 【...
Page 766 ( ss : 00 - 99 : Double figure fixation ) Bearing ( N : North / S : South ) ex ) “North Latitude 40°42’51.12” shows “40425112N”. 12. [LONGITUDE] shows West or East Longitude. The data shows “DDDMMSSssL” at DMS Format. Degree ( 000 - 180 : Triple figure fixation ) Minute...
Page 767 Create System Delete System Get/Set System Info Get/Set Trunk Info Append Site Get/Set Site Info Get/Set Motorola Custom Band Plan Get/Set Trunk Frequency Info Append Channel Group Append TalkGroup ID Group Delete Group / Site Get/Set Group Info Append Channel / Trunk Frequency Append TalkGroup ID Delete Channel Get/Set Channel Info...
Page 768 Squelch Level Settings Get/Set Squelch Level Settings Default Band Coverage Settings DBC Get/Set Default Band Coverage Settings GPS Settings Get/Set GPS Format Band Scope Settings Get/Set Band Scope Settings Get Global IF exchange Frequency IF exchange list Settings Clear IF exchange Frequency Register IF exchange Frequency TEST Get Battery Voltage...
Page 769 <COMMAND GID> Get Current TGID Status Controller → Radio GID[\r] Radio → Controller GID,[SITE_TYPE],[TGID],[ID_SRCH_MODE],[NAME1],[NAME2],[NAME3][\r] [SITE_TYPE] : Site Type : CONVENTIONAL system site : MOTOROLA system site : EDACS Narrow / Wide system site : EDACS SCAT system site : LTR system site [TGID] : TGID [ID_SRCH_MODE]...
Page 770 <COMMAND KEY> Push KEY Controller → Radio KEY,[KEY_CODE],[KEY_MODE][\r] Radio → Controller KEY,OK[\r] [KEY_CODE] : MENU : FUNC : HOLD : SCAN/SEARCH : L/O .(dot) : ./NO : E/YES > : VFO RIGHT * Set "P" to KEY_MODE. < : VFO LEFT * Set "P"...
Page 771 <COMMAND POF> Power OFF Controller → Radio POF[\r] Radio → Controller POF,OK[\r] Turns off the scanner. After this command, the scanner doesn't accept any command. <COMMAND QSH> Go to quick search hold mode Controller → Radio QSH,[FRQ],[RSV],[MOD],[ATT],[DLY],[RSV],[CODE_SRCH],[BSC],[REP],[RSV], [RSV],[RSV],[RSV][\r] Radio → Controller QSH,OK[\r] QSH,NG[\r] [FRQ]...
Page 772 <COMMAND QSC> Set current frequency and get reception status Controller → Radio QSC,[FRQ],[RSV],[MOD],[ATT],[DLY],[RSV],[CODE_SRCH],[BSC],[REP],[ RSV], [RSV],[RSV],[RSV] [\r] Radio → Controller QSC,[RSSI],[FRQ],[SQL][\r] or QSC,NG[\r] [FRQ] : Frequency (The right frequency) [MOD] : Modulation (AUTO/AM/FM/NFM/WFM/FMB) [ATT] : Attenuation (0:OFF / 1:ON) [DLY] : Delay Time (-10,-5,-2,0,1,2,5,10,30) [CODE_SRCH] : CTCSS/DCS Search...
Page 773 <COMMAND CSC> Go to Custom search and get reception status Controller → Radio ① CSC,ON[\r] ② CSC,OFF[\r] Radio → Controller ① CSC,[RSSI],[FRQ],[SQL][\r] CSC,[RSSI],[FRQ],[SQL][\r] CSC,[RSSI],[FRQ],[SQL][\r] .... CSC,[RSSI],[FRQ],[SQL][\r] ② CSC,OK[\r] [RSSI] : RSSI A/D Value (0-1023) [FRQ] : Current Frequency [SQL] : Squelch Status (0:CLOSE / 1:OPEN)
Page 774 <COMMAND STS> Get Current Status Controller → Radio STS[\r] Radio → Controller STS,[DSP_FORM],[L1_CHAR],[L1_MODE],[L2_CHAR],[L2_MODE],[L3_CHAR],[L3_MODE], [L4_CHAR],[L4_MODE],････,[L8_CHAR],[L8_MODE],[SQL],[MUT],[BAT],[WAT],[RSV], [RSV],[SIG_LVL],[RSV],[BK_DIMMER][\r] [DSP_FORM] : Display Form (4 - 8dight:########) (each # is 0 or 1) 0 means Small Font / 1 means Large Font. [L1_CHAR] : Line1 Characters 16char (fixed length) [L1_MODE] : Line1 Display Mode 16char [L2_CHAR]...
Page 775 ← [L2_CHAR] Program System ← [L2_MODE] ****************, Program Location, ← [L3_CHAR] ← [L3_MODE] ← [L4_CHAR] Srch/CloCall Opt, ← [L4_MODE] 1,0,0,0,,,0,,,[\r] Returns current scanner status. Ex.2) ┌----------------┐ ｜ HOLD L/O ｜ │System 1 Squelch Status : CLOSE │ 851.0125MHz Mute Status : ON │...
Page 776 <COMMAND GLG> Get Reception Status Controller → Radio GLG[\r] Radio → Controller GLG,[FRQ/TGID],[MOD],[ATT],[CTCSS/DCS],[NAME1],[NAME2],[NAME3],[SQL],[MUT], [SYS_TAG],[CHAN_TAG],[RSV][\r] GLG,,,,,,,,,,[\r] [FRQ/TGID] : Frequency or TGID [MOD] : Modulation (AM/FM/NFM/WFM/FMB) [ATT] : Attenuation (0:OFF / 1:ON) [CTCSS/DCS] : CTCSS/DCS Status (0-231) *See CTCSS/DCS CODE LIST about the details of this code. [NAME1] : System, Site or Search Name [NAME2]...
Page 777 CTM_MODE RESERVE CC_MODE RESERVE WX_MODE NORMAL A_ONLY SAME_1 SAME_2 SAME_3 SAME_4 SAME_5 ALL_FIPS FTO_MODE RESERVE Note) Scanner returns NG in the state that the mode switch cannot be done. <COMMAND MNU> Menu Mode Controller → Radio MNU,[MENU_INDEX][\r] → Controller Radio MNU,OK[\r] [MENU_INDEX] SVC_MENU...
Page 778 <COMMAND MDL> Get Model Info Controller → Radio MDL[\r] Radio → Controller MDL,BC346XT[\r] Returns Model Information. <COMMAND VER> Get Firmware Version Controller → Radio VER[\r] Radio → Controller VER,Version 1.00.00[\r] Returns Firmware Version. <COMMAND PRG> Enter Program Mode Controller → Radio PRG[\r] Radio →...
Page 779 <COMMAND BLT> Get/Set Backlight Controller → Radio BLT[\r] BLT, [EVNT], [RSV], [DIMMER] [\r] Radio → Controller BLT, [EVNT], [RSV], [DIMMER] [\r] BLT,OK[\r] [EVENT] IF : INFINITE 10 : 10sec 30 : 30sec KY : KEYPRESS SQ : SQUELCH [RSV] Reserve parameter, always “,” [DIMMER] Backlight Dimmer (1:Low / 2:Middle / 3:High) Get/Set Backlight Setting.
Page 780 < COMMAND COM > Get/Set COM port setting Controller → Radio COM,[/r] COM,[BAUDRATE],[RSV][/r] Radio → Controller COM,[BAUDRATE],[RSV][/r] COM,OK[/r] [BAUDRATE] :OFF 4800 :4800bps 9600 :9600bps 19200 :19200bps 38400 :38400bps 57600 :57600bps 115200:115200b Note: When receive “COM,OK”, next command should not be send in 2 second. Only PC Control (Baud Rate) does not become an initial-setting value.
Page 781 <COMMAND KBP> Get/Set Key Beep and setting Controller → Radio KBP[\r] KBP,[LEVEL],[LOCK],[SAFE][\r] Radio → Controller KBP,[LEVEL],[LOCK],[SAFE][\r] KBP,OK[\r] [LEVEL] : Beep Level (0:Auto / 1-15 / 99:OFF) [LOCK] : Key Lock status (0:OFF / 1:ON) [SAFE] : Key Safe status (0:OFF / 1:ON) Get/Set Key Beep Setting.
Page 782 <COMMAND SCT> Get System Count Controller → Radio SCT[\r] Radio → Controller SCT,###[\r] : ### (0 - 500) Returns the number of stored System. This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode. <COMMAND SIH> Get System Index Head Controller → Radio SIH[\r] Radio →...
Page 783 [PAGE4] : Quick Key41 - 49,40 [PAGE5] : Quick Key51 - 59,50 [PAGE6] : Quick Key61 - 69,60 [PAGE7] : Quick Key71 - 79,70 [PAGE8] : Quick Key81 - 89,80 [PAGE9] : Quick Key91 - 99,90 This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode. It cannot turn on/off the Quick Key that has no System / Site.
Page 784 <COMMAND DSY> Delete System Controller → Radio DSY,[SYS_INDEX][\r] Radio → Controller DSY,OK[\r] [SYS_INDEX] : System Index This command deletes a System. This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode. <COMMAND SIN> Get/Set System Info Controller → Radio SIN,[INDEX][\r] SIN,[INDEX],[NAME],[QUICK_KEY],[HLD],[LOUT],[DLY],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV], [RSV],[START_KEY],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[NUMBER_TAG], [RSV],[RSV],[RSV][\r] Radio →...
Page 785 The scanner returns only "," to punctuate for parameters which are not appropriate the system type. In set command, the scanner neglects the parameters that are not appropriate the system type. In set command, only "," parameters are not changed. The set command is aborted if any format error is detected.
Page 786 The scanner returns only "," to punctuate for parameters which are not appropriate the system type. In set command, the scanner neglects the parameters that are not appropriate the system. In set command, only "," parameters are not changed. The set command is aborted if any format error is detected. When the system protect bit is ON, except [TGID_GRP_HEAD], [TGID_GRP_TAIL], [ID_LOUT_GRP_HEAD], [ID_LOUT_GRP_TAIL], other parameters will be send as a reserve parameter in the Radio ->...
Page 787 [SYS_INDEX] : System Index [CHN_HEAD] : Channel Index Head of the Group List [CHN_TAIL] : Channel Index Tail of the Group List [SEQ_NO] : Site Sequence Number (1-256) [START_KEY] : Startup Configuration (0-9/.(dot) means none) [LATITUDE] : North or South Latitude [LONGITUDE] : West or East Longitude [RANGE]...
Page 788 "6875": 68.75k "7000": 70.0k "7500": 75.0k "8000": 80.0k “8125": 81.25k "8500": 85.0k “8750": 87.5k "9000": 90.0k “9375": 93.75k "9500": 95.0k "10000": 100.0k [OFFSETn] : Offset n (-1023 to 1023) Get/Sets Band Plan Setting for MOT 800 custom/VHF/UHF site. In set command, if only "," parameters are send the Band Plan setting of the site will not changed.
Page 789 <COMMAND AGC> Append Channel Group Controller → Radio AGC,[SYS_INDEX][\r] Radio → Controller AGC,[GRP_INDEX][\r] [SYS_INDEX] : System Index [GRP_INDEX] : appended Channel Group Index Append Channel Group to the system. Returns "-1" if the scanner failed to create because of no resource. This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode.
Page 790 <COMMAND GIN> Get/Set Group Info Controller → Radio GIN,[GRP_INDEX][\r] GIN,[GRP_INDEX],[NAME],[QUICK_KEY],[LOUT],[LATITUDE],[LONGITUDE],[RANGE], [GPS ENABLE][\r] Radio → Controller GIN,[GRP_TYPE],[NAME],[QUICK_KEY],[LOUT],[REV_INDEX],[FWD_INDEX],[SYS_INDEX], [CHN_HEAD],[CHN_TAIL],[SEQ_NO] ,[LATITUDE],[LONGITUDE],[RANGE],[GPS ENABLE] [\r] GIN,OK[\r] For Group Information [GRP_INDEX] : Group Index [GRP_TYPE] : Group Type (C: Channel Group / T: TGID Group) [NAME] : Name (max.16char) [QUICK_KEY]...
Page 791 <COMMAND ACC> Append Channel / Trunk Frequency Controller → Radio ACC,[GRP_INDEX][\r] Radio → Controller ACC,[CHN_INDEX][\r] [GRP_INDEX] : Channel Group Index [CHN_INDEX] : Appended Channel Index - or - [GRP_INDEX] : Site Index [CHN_INDEX] : Appended Trunk Frequency Index Append Channel to the group. Or, append Trunk Frequency to the Site. Returns "-1"...
Page 792 <COMMAND CIN> Get/Set Channel Info Controller → Radio CIN,[INDEX][\r] CIN,[INDEX],[NAME],[FRQ],[MOD],[CTCSS/DCS],[TLOCK],[LOUT],[PRI],[ATT],[ALT], [ALTL],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[NUMBER_TAG],[RSV],[ALT_PATTERN], [VOL_OFFSET] [\r] Radio → Controller CIN,[NAME],[FRQ],[MOD],[CTCSS/DCS],[TLOCK],[LOUT],[PRI],[ATT],[ALT],[ALTL], [REV_INDEX],[FWD_INDEX],[SYS_INDEX],[GRP_INDEX],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV], [NUMBER_TAG],[RSV],[ ALT_PATTERN],[VOL_OFFSET] [\r] CIN,OK[\r] [INDEX] : Channel Index [NAME] : Name (max.16char) [FRQ] : Channel Frequency [MOD] : Modulation (AUTO/AM/FM/NFM/WFM/FMB) [ATT] : Attenuation (0:OFF / 1:ON) [CTCSS/DCS] : CTCSS/DCS Status...
Page 793 <COMMAND TIN> Get/Set TGID Info Controller → Radio TIN,[INDEX][\r] TIN,[INDEX],[NAME],[TGID],[LOUT],[PRI],[ALT],[ALTL],[RSV],[RSV], [NUMBER_TAG],[RSV],[ALT_PATTERN],[VOL_OFFSET][\r] Radio → Controller TIN,[NAME],[TGID],[LOUT],[PRI],[ALT],[ALTL],[REV_INDEX],[FWD_INDEX], [SYS_INDEX],[GRP_INDEX],[RSV],[RSV], [NUMBER_TAG],[RSV], [ALT_PATTERN],[VOL_OFFSET] [\r] TIN,OK[\r] [INDEX] : TGID Index [NAME] : Name (max.16char) [TGID] : TGID [LOUT] : Lockout (0:Unlocked / 1:Lockout) [PRI] : Priority (0:OFF / 1:ON) [ALT] : Alert Tone...
Page 794 <COMMAND SLI> Get Search L/O TGID Controller → Radio SLI,[SYS_INDEX][\r] Radio → Controller SLI,[TGID][\r] SLI,-1[\r] : No more lockout TGID This command is used to get Search L/O TGID list of the system. Search L/O TGID is the L/O TGID which doesn't belong to any group in the system as a TGID.
Page 795 <COMMAND REV> Get Rev Index Controller → Radio REV,[INDEX][\r] Radio → Controller REV,[INDEX][\r] [INDEX] : Index of system, site, group, channel, TGID or Location Alert System. Returns reverse(backward) index of the index in the memory chain. Returns -1 if no more index exists. This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode.
Page 796 <COMMAND MEM> Get Memory Used Controller → Radio MEM[\r] Radio → Controller MEM,[MEMORY_USED],[SYS],[SITE],[CHN],[LOC][\r] [MEMORY_USED] : The percent of memory that is used (0 - 100) [SYS] : The number of systems that is created (0 – 500) [SITE] : The number of sites that is created (0 - 1000) [CHN] : The number of channels that is created...
Page 797 <COMMAND CLA> Create Location Alert System Controller → Radio CLA,[LAS_TYPE][\r] Radio → Controller CLA,[INDEX][\r] [LAS_TYPE] : Location Alert Type (POI: POI / DROAD: Dangerous Road / DXING: Dangerous Xing) [INDEX] : Location Alert System Index Creates a system and return created location alert system index. The index is a handle to get/set location alert system information.
Page 798 <COMMAND LIN> Get/Set Location Alert System Info Controller → Radio LIN,[INDEX][\r] LIN,[INDEX],[LAS_TYPE],[NAME],[LOUT],[ALT],[ALTL],[LATITUDE],[LONGITUDE], [RANGE],[SPEED],[DIR],[RSV],[ALT_PATTERN][\r] Radio → Controller LIN,[LAS_TYPE],[NAME],[LOUT],[ALT],[ALTL],[REV_INDEX],[FWD_INDEX],[SEQ_NO], [LATITUDE],[LONGITUDE],[RANGE],[SPEED],[DIR],[RSV],[ALT_PATTERN] [\r] LIN,OK[\r] [INDEX] : Location Alert System Index [LAS_TYPE] : Location Alert Type (POI: POI / DROAD: Dangerous Road / DXING: Dangerous Xing) [NAME] : Name (max.16char)
Page 799 <COMMAND SCO> Get/Set Search/Close Call Settings Controller → Radio SCO[\r] SCO,[RSV],[MOD],[ATT],[DLY],[RSV],[CODE_SRCH],[BSC],[REP],[RSV],[RSV], [MAX_STORE],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV][\r] Radio → Controller SCO,[RSV],[MOD],[ATT],[DLY],[RSV],[CODE_SRCH],[BSC],[REP],[RSV],[RSV], [MAX_STORE],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV] [\r] SCO,OK[\r] [MOD] : Modulation (AUTO/AM/FM/NFM/WFM/FMB) [ATT] : Attenuation (0:OFF / 1:ON) [DLY] : Delay Time (-10,-5,-2,0,1,2,5,10,30) [CODE_SRCH] : CTCSS/DCS Search (0:OFF / 1: CTCSS/DCS Search) [BSC] : Broadcast Screen (16digit: ########･･#)
Page 800 <COMMAND SHK> Get/Set Search Key Settings Controller → Radio SHK[\r] SHK,[SRCH_KEY_1],[SRCH_KEY_2],[SRCH_KEY_3],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV][\r] Radio → Controller SHK,[SRCH_KEY_1],[SRCH_KEY_2],[SRCH_KEY_3],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV][\r],SHK,OK[\r] [SRCH_KEY_1] - [SRCH_KEY_3] : Search Range .(dot) : Not assign PublicSafety: Public Safety range CUSTOM_1: Custom 1 range News : News range CUSTOM_2: Custom 2 range : HAM Radio range CUSTOM_3: Custom 3 range Marine...
Page 801 <COMMAND ULF> Unlock Global L/O Controller → Radio ULF,[FRQ][\r] Radio → Controller ULF,OK[\r] [FRQ] : Lockout Frequency (250000-13000000) This command unlocks a L/O frequency. The frequency is deleted from L/O list. This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode. <COMMAND LOF > Lock Out Frequency Controller →...
Page 802 <COMMAND CLC> Get/Set Close Call Settings Controller → Radio CLC[\r] CLC,[CC_MODE],[CC_OVERRIDE],[RSV],[ALTB],[ALTL],[ALTP],[CC_BAND],[LOUT], [HLD],[QUICK_KEY],[NUMBER_TAG],[RSV],[ALT_PATTERN][\r] Radio → Controller CLC,[CC_MODE],[CC_OVERRIDE],[RSV],[ALTB],[ALTL],[ALTP],[CC_BAND],[LOUT], [HLD],[QUICK_KEY],[NUMBER_TAG],[RSV],[ALT_PATTERN][\r] CLC,OK[\r] [CC_MODE] : Mode ( 0:OFF / 1:CC PRI / 2:CC DND) [CC_OVERRIDE] : Override (1:ON / 0:OFF) [ALTB] : Alert Beep (0:OFF / 1-9:Tone No) [ALTL] : Alert Tone Level (0:AUTO/ 1-15)
Page 803 <COMMAND SSP> Get/Set Service Search Settings Controller → Radio SSP,[SRCH_INDEX][\r] SSP,[SRCH_INDEX],[DLY],[ATT],[HLD],[LOUT],[QUICK_KEY],[START_KEY],[RSV], [NUMBER_TAG],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV] [\r] Radio → Controller SSP,[SRCH_INDEX],[DLY],[ATT],[HLD],[LOUT],[QUICK_KEY],[START_KEY],[RSV], [NUMBER_TAG],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV] [\r] SSP,OK[\r] [SRCH_INDEX] : Service Search Range 1 : Public Safety 6 : Air 12 : Special 2 : News 7 : CB Radio 3 : HAM Radio 8 : FRS/GMRS/MURS 4 : Marine...
Page 804 <COMMAND CBP> Get/Set C-Ch Only Custom Search MOT Band Plan Settings Controller → Radio CBP,[SRCH_INDEX][\r] CBP,[SRCH_INDEX],[MOT_TYPE],[LOWER1],[UPPER1],[STEP1],[OFFSET1],[LOWER2], [UPPER2],[STEP2],[OFFSET2],[LOWER3],[UPPER3],[STEP3],[OFFSET3],[LOWER4], [UPPER4],[STEP4],[OFFSET4],[LOWER5],[UPPER5],[STEP5],[OFFSET5],[LOWER6], [UPPER6],[STEP6],[OFFSET6][\r], Radio → Controller CBP,[MOT_TYPE],[LOWER1],[UPPER1],[STEP1],[OFFSET1],[LOWER2],[UPPER2],[STEP2], [OFFSET2],[LOWER3],[UPPER3],[STEP3],[OFFSET3],[LOWER4],[UPPER4],[STEP4], [OFFSET4],[LOWER5],[UPPER5],[STEP5],[OFFSET5],[LOWER6],[UPPER6],[STEP6], [OFFSET6][\r], CBP, OK[\r] [SRCH_INDEX : Index (1-9,0 means 10) [MOT_TYPE] : Band type for MOT(STD/ SPL/CUSTOM) [LOWER n] : Lower Frequency n [UPPER n]...
Page 805 <COMMAND CSP> Get/Set Custom Search Settings Controller → Radio CSP,[SRCH_INDEX][\r] CSP,[SRCH_INDEX],[NAME],[LIMIT_L],[LIMIT_H],[STP],[MOD],[ATT],[DLY],[RSV], [HLD],[LOUT],[C-CH],[RSV],[RSV],[QUICK_KEY],[START_KEY],[RSV],[NUMBER_TAG], [RSV],[RSV],[RSV][\r] Radio → Controller CSP,[NAME],[LIMIT_L],[LIMIT_H],[STP],[MOD],[ATT],[DLY],[RSV],[HLD],[LOUT], [C- CH],[RSV],[RSV],[QUICK_KEY],[START_KEY],[RSV],[NUMBER_TAG],[RSV], [RSV],[RSV][\r] CSP,OK[\r] [SRCH_INDEX] : Index (1-9,0 means 10) [NAME] : Name (max.16char) [LIMIT_L] : Lower Limit Frequency (250000-13000000) [LIMIT_H] : Upper Limit Frequency (250000-13000000) [STP] : Search Step...
Page 806 <COMMAND WXS> Get/Set Weather Settings Controller → Radio WXS[\r] WXS,[DLY],[ATT],[ALT_PRI],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV][\r] Radio → Controller WXS,[DLY],[ATT],[ALT_PRI],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV] [\r] WXS,OK[\r] [DLY] : Delay Time (-10,-5,-2,0,1,2,5,10,30) [ATT] : Attenuation (0:OFF / 1:ON) [ALT_PRI] : Weather Alert Priority (0:OFF / 1:ON) Get/Set Weather Priority Settings. This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode. <COMMAND SGP>...
Page 807 <COMMAND TON> Get/Set Tone-Out Settings Controller → Radio TON,[INDEX][\r] TON,[INDEX],[NAME],[FRQ],[MOD],[ATT],[DLY],[ALT],[ALTL],[TONE_A],[RSV], [TONE_B],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV] ,[RSV],[ALT_PATTERN],[RSV],[RSV], [RSV] [\r] Radio → Controller TON,[INDEX],[NAME],[FRQ],[MOD],[ATT],[DLY],[ALT],[ALTL],[TONE_A],[RSV], [TONE_B],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV] ,[RSV],[ALT_PATTERN],[RSV],[RSV], [RSV] [\r] TON,OK[\r] [INDEX] : Index (1-9,0 means 10) [NAME] : Name (max.16char) [FRQ] : Channel Frequency [MOD] : Modulation (AUTO / FM / NFM) [ATT] : Attenuation...
Page 808 <COMMAND SCN> Get/Set Scanner Option Settings Controller → Radio SCN[\r] SCN,[DISP_MODE],[RSV],[CH_LOG],[G_ATT],[RSV],[RSV][RSV],[RSV],[RSV], [RSV],[RSV], [RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV], [RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV][\r] Radio → Controller SCN,[DISP_MODE],[RSV],[CH_LOG],[G_ATT],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV], [RSV], [RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV],[RSV][\r] SCN,OK[\r] [DISP_MODE] : DISPLAY MODE ( 1:MODE1 / 2:MODE2 / 3:MODE3 ) [CH_LOG] : Control Channel Logging ( 0:OFF / 1:ON / 2:Extend ) [G_ATT] : Global attenuator ( 0: OFF / 1: ON )
Page 809 <COMMAND DBC> Get/Set Default Band Coverage Settings Controller → Radio DBC,[BNAD_NO][\r] DBC,[BNAD_NO],[STEP],[MOD][\r] Radio → Controller DBC, [STEP],[MOD] [\r] DBC,OK[\r] [BAND_NO] : Band No (1-31) Band number of band coverage [STP] : Search Step : 5k : 6.25k : 7.5 k : 8.33k 1000 : 10k...
Page 810 <COMMAND BSP> Get/Set Band Scope System Settings Controller → Radio BSP[\r] BSP,[FRQ],[STP],[SPN],[MAX_HOLD][\r] Radio → Controller BSP,[FRQ],[STP],[SPN],[MAX_HOLD][\r] BSP,OK[\r] [FRQ] : Center Frequency [STP] : Search Step : 5k : 6.25k : 7.5 k : 8.33k 1000 : 10k 1250 : 12.5k 1500 : 15k 2000...
Page 811 <COMMAND CIE> Clear IF exchange Frequency Controller → Radio CIE,[FRQ][\r] Radio → Controller CIE,OK[\r] [FRQ] : IF Exchange Frequency (250000-13000000) This command clear Frequency from Global IF exchange Frequency list. This command is only acceptable in Programming Mode. <COMMAND RIE> Register IF exchange Frequency Controller →...
Page 812 CTCSS/DCS CODE LIST CTCSS MODE CODE CTCSS 114.8Hz CTCSS 179.9Hz CTCSS 67.0Hz CTCSS 118.8Hz CTCSS 183.5Hz CTCSS 69.3Hz CTCSS 123.0Hz CTCSS 186.2Hz CTCSS 71.9Hz CTCSS 127.3Hz CTCSS 189.9Hz CTCSS 74.4Hz CTCSS 131.8Hz CTCSS 192.8Hz CTCSS 77.0Hz CTCSS 136.5Hz CTCSS 196.6Hz CTCSS 79.7Hz CTCSS 141.3Hz CTCSS 199.5Hz...
Page 813 FONT DATA Character pattern of 8 x 16 dot This character pattern is Large Font. *In this document, characters of these areas are described as normal characters.
Page 819 Character pattern of 8 x 8 dot This character pattern is Small Font.
Page 822 MenuReference < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Menu reference BC346XT main menu Program System Program Location Srch/CloCall Opt Search for... Close Call Priority Scan WX Operation Tone-Out for... Wired Clone Settings Using the menu To open the menu, tap MENU . Turn the SELECT-VOLUME-SQUELCH knob to move the cursor and highlight menu items.
Page 823 BC346XTDisplays < UnidenMan4 < TWiki BC346XT displays This page applies to the BC346XT. For other models, see: BCD396XT and BCD996XT Reading the Display BCT15X Reading the Display The display icons vary depending on the status of the scanner and what youre doing at any given time.
Page 824 BC346XTDisplays < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Blinking icon: The battery is low. (If the AC adapter is connected while the icon is blinking, the battery is incorrectly installed, is the wrong type, or has gone bad.) Channel Info icon Cxx.x: The scanner has detected a CTCSS code; the received code is displayed in place of the Xs.
Page 825 BC346XTDisplays < UnidenMan4 < TWiki In Custom Search mode: The numbers of any programmed search ranges are display on this line. The number of the custom range that is currently being searched blinks. Hold icon The scanner is in Hold mode. IFX icon You switched to the intermediate frequency (IF exchange).
Page 826 BC346XTDisplays < UnidenMan4 < TWiki In Service Search mode: The icon SCR replaces the System numbers if the broadcast screen feature is turned on. Weather alert icon Weather Alert Priority scan is turned on. Special displays In some operation modes, the display can be very different from the main display. These modes also have 2 or 3 different displays you can cycle through.
Page 827 file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/C...e_090515/Manual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/ConventionalSystems/RRConvList.png file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Docum...nual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/ConventionalSystems/RRConvList.png5/26/2009 11:14:39 AM...
Page 828 file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/C...e_090515/Manual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/ConventionalSystems/Layoutconv.png file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Docume...anual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/ConventionalSystems/Layoutconv.png5/26/2009 11:14:40 AM...
Page 829 file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/C...090515/Manual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/ConventionalSystems/LayoutLegend.png file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Docume...ual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/ConventionalSystems/LayoutLegend.png5/26/2009 11:14:41 AM...
Page 830 Conventional System Worksheet System Name: System Number Tag: System Quick Key: Group Name: Group Quick Key: System Startup Key: Location Info: Channel information: Frequency Name (Alpha Tag) Number Tag CTCSS/DCS/NAC Priority Modulation Alert...
Page 832 ProgramSystem < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Program System To determine whether the information on this page applies to your scanner, see the tags at the bottom of the page. The Program System menu lets you create systems and edit existing systems. All existing systems are listed in the order they were created: select the system you want to edit, or select New System to create a new one.
Page 833 ProgramSystem < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Enter a name or edit the existing one. Names can be 16 characters long, and they can contain upper and lower case letters, punctuation, and spaces. Turn the SELECT- VOLUME-SQUELCH knob on the handheld scanners or the SCROLL / FUNCTION knob on mobile scanners to choose the character you want, then press 6 (right cursor) to move the cursor to the next character.
Page 834 ProgramSystem < UnidenMan4 < TWiki This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCD396XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...ments/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/ProgramSystem.html (3 of 3)5/26/2009 11:14:42 AM...
Page 835 Set State (BCT15X Only) Conventional system options Set Quick Key Set Startup Key Set Lockout Set Hold Time P25 Waiting Time (BCD396XT and BCD996XT Only) Trunked system options ID Scan/Search Priority ID Scan Emergency Alert Set ID Format (DEC/HEX) or (AFS/DEC)
Page 836 You can turn on the gain control for Analog and Digital signals separately. To change the settings for the audio AGC, see Adjust Audio AGC Set Record (BCD996XT BCT15X Only) Set whether the audio from channels on the system come out the RECORD OUT jack on the back of the scanner.
Page 837 EditSysOption < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Set State (BCT15X Only) Sets the U.S. State or Canadian Province associated with the system. If selected, the system will be unlocked when you set the scanner to the state and locked out when you select a different state.
Page 838: Emergency Alert
0 through 255 (0 is the default). P25 Waiting Time (BCD396XT BCD996XT Only) On channels that contain a mix of analog and digital signals (i.e., where the Audio Mode is set to All), it is possible to have false decode problems caused by digital noise at the beginning of transmissions.
Page 839: Edit Fleet Map
EditSysOption < UnidenMan4 < TWiki This menu lets you configure whether the scanner triggers an alert tone and light when it detects an emergency flag within an active Talk Group. (Compare this to the channel setting Alert, which can trigger an alert tone and light whenever a channel becomes active.) The settings for Set Alert Tone Set Alert Light...
Page 840: Set Status Bit
Choose whether the scanner recognizes any end transmission codes when deciding to leave a channel. You have the following options: BCD396XT and BCD996XT: Analog: The scanner recognizes only analog end transmission codes. Analog-Digital: The scanner recognizes both analog and digital end codes.
Page 841 EditSysOption < UnidenMan4 < TWiki This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/EditSysOption.html (7 of 7)5/26/2009 11:14:43 AM...
Page 842 EditGroup < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Edit Group To determine whether the information on this page applies to your scanner, see the tags at the bottom of the page. When you create a new channel group, the scanner automatically assigns a default name of Group XX, where XX is a 2-digit sequential number (1 through 20).
Page 843 EditGroup < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Edit Channel Use this menu to program channel information for this group. Click on your scanner model below to go the correct Edit channel menu: BCD396XT and BCD996XT Edit Channel menu BC346XT and BCT15X Edit Channel menu Set LocationInfo Use this menu to program location information for this group.
Page 844 SetLocationInfo < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Set LocationInfo Use this menu to configure geographic information for each system or site. With this information and a standard NMEA GPS input, the scanner can automatically change which systems, sites and channel groups it scans as you change location. You must set the location information if you want to use Location-based Scanning.
Page 845 Turn this feature on if you want the scanner to lock out this site or channel group when you leave the range and enable the site or channel group when you are within the range. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Do...ents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/SetLocationInfo.html (2 of 2)5/26/2009 11:14:44 AM...
Page 846 Options available for all channels: Edit Name Set Audio Type Set Number Tag Set Modulation Set Attenuator Set Priority Set Alert Set Record (BCD996XT and BCT15X only) Set Lockout Volume Offset Copy Channel Delete Channel New Channel Analog channel options Set CTCSS/DCS...
Page 847: Set Audio Type
EditChannel < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Edit Frequency (conventional systems) Enter a valid frequency for this band. If the frequency is invalid or if it already exists, the scanner sounds an error tone and prompts you enter the frequency again. Edit Talk Group ID (trunked systems) Options available for all channels: You have the following options for channels (click on any setting for an explanation):...
Page 848 Set Alert Tone Set Alert Light common to both types of alerts. Set Record (BCD996XT BCT15X only) This item lets you select whether the channel's audio is output from the RECORD OUT jack on the back of the scanner. Note that you must also set the RECORD --> Marked Channel System Option to fully enable this function.
Page 849 EditChannel < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Unlocked: The channel is not locked out. Temporary L/O: The channel is locked out until you turn the scanner off and back Lockout: The channel is permanently locked out. Volume Offset The scanner can automatically adjust the volume when it tunes to this channel or frequency.
Page 850 Set P25 NAC: The scanner opens squelch only for signals that include the NAC you enter here. Enter a hexadecimal number between 0 and FFF. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCD396XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/EditChannel.html (5 of 5)5/26/2009 11:14:45 AM...
Page 851 TemplateVolumeOffset < UnidenMan4 < TWiki The scanner can automatically adjust the volume when it tunes to this channel or frequency. Enter one of the following options: Softer Louder Change -3, -2, - 0 (default) +1, +2, file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Docum...ts/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/TemplateVolumeOffset.html5/26/2009 11:14:46 AM...
Page 852 file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/te...090515/Manual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/EDACSSCATSystems/RREDACSSCAT.png file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Do...ual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/EDACSSCATSystems/RREDACSSCAT.png5/26/2009 11:14:46 AM...
Page 853 file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/tem...e_090515/Manual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/EDACSSCATSystems/LayoutSCAT.png file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Doc...anual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/EDACSSCATSystems/LayoutSCAT.png5/26/2009 11:14:47 AM...
Page 854 file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp..._090515/Manual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/EDACSSCATSystems/LayoutLegend.png file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Docu...nual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/EDACSSCATSystems/LayoutLegend.png5/26/2009 11:14:47 AM...
Page 855 Set LocationInfo Set State (BCT15X Only) Delete Site New Site Options available for Motorola systems Edit Band Plan P25 Waiting Time (BCD396XT and BCD996XT Only) Options available for P25 systems (BCD396XT and BCD996XT Only) file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/EditSite.html (1 of 5)5/26/2009 11:14:48 AM...
Page 856 EditSite < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Edit Band Plan (P25) Options available for EDACS systems Set Site Type Volume Offset (EDACS SCAT Only) Options available for all sites: You have the following options for sites: Edit Name Enter a name or edit the existing one. Names can be 16 characters long, and they can contain upper and lower case letters, punctuation, and spaces.
Page 857 EditSite < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Auto The scanner uses the default modulation type for this frequency's band. NFM The scanner treats the frequency as a Narrowband FM band. FM The scanner treats the frequency as an FM band. Set Attenuator Turn on attenuation to reduce the signal strength by 20 dB.
Page 858: Delete Site
Delete this site and all its settings; this includes any frequencies. New Site Create a new site. Options available for Motorola systems Edit Band Plan P25 Waiting Time (BCD396XT BCD996XT Only) Options available for P25 systems (BCD396XT BCD996XT Only) Edit Band Plan (P25) Most P25 systems include the band plan information in the control channel data.
Page 859: Set Site Type
The scanner can automatically adjust the volume when it tunes to this channel or frequency. Enter one of the following options: Softer Louder Change -3, -2, - 0 (default) +1, +2, This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/EditSite.html (5 of 5)5/26/2009 11:14:48 AM...
Page 860 EDACS SCAT system options Set Number Tag Volume Offset Set Record (BCD996XT and BCT15X Only) Edit Frequency Enter a valid frequency for this band. If the frequency is invalid or if it already exists, the scanner sounds an error tone and prompts you to re-enter the frequency.
Page 861: Delete Frequency
SetFrequencies < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Temporary Lockout - The lockout will be cleared when you cycle power. Lockout - The lockout must be manually cleared. Unlocked - The scanner will use the frequency when monitoring the system. Delete Frequency Delete this frequency or channel and all associated settings. New Frequency Create a new frequency.
Page 862 Louder Change -3, -2, - 0 (default) +1, +2, Set Record (BCD996XT and BCT15X Only) Turn on this option to have the scanner output transmissions from the RECORD OUT jack. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/SetFrequencies.html (3 of 3)5/26/2009 11:14:49 AM...
Page 863 file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/tem...0515/Manual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/EDACSTrunkedSystems/RREDACSWide.gif file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Docu...al/rsrc/UnidenMan4/EDACSTrunkedSystems/RREDACSWide.gif5/26/2009 11:14:49 AM...
Page 864 file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp...90515/Manual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/EDACSTrunkedSystems/LayoutEDACS.png file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Docu...al/rsrc/UnidenMan4/EDACSTrunkedSystems/LayoutEDACS.png5/26/2009 11:14:50 AM...
Page 865 EDACS/LTR System Worksheet A System Name: System Number Tag: Group Name: Group Quick Key: Location Info: Channel information: Talk Group ID (TGID) Name (Alpha Tag) Number Tag Priority Alert...
Page 866 EDACS/LTR System Worksheet B System Name: System Number Tag: Site Name: Site Type: Site Quick Key: Site Number Tag: Location Info: Site Startup Key: Channel information: Frequency Name (Alpha Tag) Number Tag Priority Modulation Alert...
Page 867 ScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Scan mode This page applies only to the BCD396XT and BC346XT. For other models see: BCD996XT Scan Mode BCT15X Scan Mode Scanning vs. Searching Scanning trunked systems Searching trunked systems Default Scan Mode Locked Items...
Page 868 ScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki programmed for this system. If any programmed Talk Group ID becomes active, the scanner switches to the voice channel and monitors the transmission until it ends or until the Delay Time expires. The scanner checks each unlocked Talk Group ID at least once; if the hold time has expired, it moves on to the next system.
Page 869 ScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 5. Searches through any unlocked frequencies saved in the Custom Search list. 6. Checks any frequencies saved in the Close Call Hits list. Locked Items The scanner does not check locked out items in either scanning or searching: A system or site is considered locked if its SQK is turned off Set Lockout...
Page 870 ScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key Name (2nd operation) Action On HOLD (Close 3 (Search 3) 2 (Search 2) 1 (Search 1) Call) Enter Hold mode Disable the systems or sites assigned to this System/ (the scanner Site Quick Key (SQK). Tap again to enable. opens squelch).
Page 871 ScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki FUNCTION When scanning a Disable the channel groups assigned to this Group + Tap conventional Quick Key (GQK). Tap again to enable. system, display the Quick Search prompt (enter Search mode). When scanning a trunked system, switch between ID Scan and ID Search.
Page 872 ScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki FUNCTION Temporarily lock Disable the channel groups assigned to this Group + Tap out the current Quick Key (GQK). Tap again to enable. sytem or site (until you turn off the scanner). FUNCTION Permanently lock + Double out the current system or site.
Page 873 ScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Special keys Turn the SELECT-VOLUME-SCROLL knob to change the direction of the search. While monitoring a channel, turn the SELECT-VOLUME-SCROLL knob to resume searching. In Custom Search mode, FUNCTION + turn the SELECT-VOLUME-SCROLL knob to select a custom search range. The scanner starts at the custom search range you select here.
Page 874 ScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key Name (2nd operation) Action on: Scan (Search) 6 (Display mode) 5 (Volume 4 (IF exchange) offset) Switch to Scan Disable the custom search range assigned to this key. mode. Tap again to enable. FUNCTION Resume When Switch the...
Page 875 ScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki FUNCTION Review the list Toggle the Change the + Tap of locked out attenuator state modulation. frequencies. for this channel. FUNCTION Toggle the Show the + Press & attenuator state repeater reverse hold for all signals. frequency for the current frequency (the...
Page 876 ScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/ScanMode.html (10 of 10)5/26/2009 11:14:57 AM...
Page 877: Edit Talk Group Id
All Talk Group IDs must be in the proper format for each system type. Motorola Type I Systems Motorola Type II Systems P25 Single Frequency Systems (BCD396XT and BCD996XT only) or Standard System Trunk Site EDACS Wide or Narrow Systems...
Page 878: Afs Format
Press yes when you're finished. P25 Single Frequency Systems (BCD396XT BCD996XT only) or Standard System Trunk Site Decimal format: Enter the TGID in numbers only, up to 8 digits Hexadecimal format: up to 6 characters Select the first Hex character (0 through F), then move the cursor to the right and select the second character.
Page 879: Ltr Systems
Leave the User ID empty to treat it as a wildcard. For example, "1-15-" will match all User IDs for Area Code 1, Home repeater 15. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Do...ents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/EditTalkGroupID.html (3 of 3)5/26/2009 11:14:58 AM...
Page 880 file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/LTRTrunkedSystems/RRLTR.gif file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Docu...515/Manual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/LTRTrunkedSystems/RRLTR.gif5/26/2009 11:14:58 AM...
Page 881 file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp...ge_090515/Manual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/LTRTrunkedSystems/LayoutLTR.PNG file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Docu...Manual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/LTRTrunkedSystems/LayoutLTR.PNG5/26/2009 11:14:59 AM...
Page 882 file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/...90515/Manual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/MotorolaTrunkedSystems/RRMOT800a.gif file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Docum...al/rsrc/UnidenMan4/MotorolaTrunkedSystems/RRMOT800a.gif5/26/2009 11:15:00 AM...
Page 883 file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/...90515/Manual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/MotorolaTrunkedSystems/RRMOT800b.gif file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Docum...al/rsrc/UnidenMan4/MotorolaTrunkedSystems/RRMOT800b.gif5/26/2009 11:15:01 AM...
Page 884 file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp...90515/Manual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/MotorolaTrunkedSystems/RRMOTUHF.gif file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Docu...al/rsrc/UnidenMan4/MotorolaTrunkedSystems/RRMOTUHF.gif5/26/2009 11:15:01 AM...
Page 885 file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp...90515/Manual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/MotorolaTrunkedSystems/RRMOTVHF.gif file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Docu...al/rsrc/UnidenMan4/MotorolaTrunkedSystems/RRMOTVHF.gif5/26/2009 11:15:01 AM...
Page 886 file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/C...5/Manual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/MotorolaTrunkedSystems/LayoutMotorola.png file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Docum...rc/UnidenMan4/MotorolaTrunkedSystems/LayoutMotorola.png5/26/2009 11:15:02 AM...
Page 887 Motorola System Worksheet A (scan) System Name: System Number Tag: System Type: Group Name: Group Quick Key: (available types: Type I, Type II: 800 MHz/Standard, 800 MHz/Splinter, UHF, VHF) Channel information: TGID Number Tag Name (Alpha Tag) Priority Alert...
Page 888 Motorola System Worksheet B (search) System Name: Fleet Map #: Sys. Number Tag: System Type: Site Name: Site Quick Key: Location Info: (available types: Type I, Type II: 800 MHz/Standard, 800 MHz/Splinter, UHF, VHF) Frequency information: Band Plan Infomation: Frequency: Name (Alpha Tag) Number Tag Band Plan...
Page 889 Motorola System Worksheet B (Fleet Maps) Fleet Map #: Fleet Map #: Fleet Map #: Fleet Map #: Block Information: Block Information: Block Information: Block Information: Block Size Code Block Size Code Block Size Code Block Size Code Block 0 Block 0 Block 0 Block 0...
Page 890: Band Plan Number
EditBandPlan < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Edit Band Plan (Motorola systems only) The scanner prompts you to choose one of the two standard band plan types: 800/900 Standard or 800 Splinter. Choose Custom if you need to create your own band plan. Creating a custom band plan Band plan number Set Base Freq...
Page 891: Set Spacing
EditBandPlan < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Set Spacing Select the number of kHz between each channel. Your options are: 5.00 6.25 10.00 12.50 15.00 18.75 20.00 25.00 30.00 31.25 35.00 37.50 40.00 43.75 45.00 50.00 55.00 56.25 60.00 62.50 65.00 68.75 70.00 75.00 80.00...
Page 892 EditBandPlan < UnidenMan4 < TWiki This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/EditBandPlan.html (3 of 3)5/26/2009 11:15:05 AM...
Page 893 file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/C..._090515/Manual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/StandardP25TrunkedSystems/RRP25.gif file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Docum...ual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/StandardP25TrunkedSystems/RRP25.gif5/26/2009 11:15:18 AM...
Page 894 file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/C...515/Manual/rsrc/UnidenMan4/StandardP25TrunkedSystems/Layout P25.png file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Docum...rsrc/UnidenMan4/StandardP25TrunkedSystems/LayoutP25.png5/26/2009 11:15 :20 AM...
Page 895 file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/...rc/UnidenMan4/SingleFrequencyP25TrunkedSystems/LayoutP251freq.PNG file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Docum...an4/SingleFrequencyP25TrunkedSystems/LayoutP251freq.PNG5/26/2009 11:15:21 AM...
Page 896 BCD996XTHoldMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Hold mode This page applies only to the BCD996XT. For other models see: BCD396XT and BC346XT Hold Mode BCT15X Hold Mode Hold mode lets you edit the current frequency, system, site, or channel. You can access these functions by...
Page 897 BCD996XTHoldMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Press & Go to Weather Hold Scan mode. Key Name (2nd operation) 7 (Attenuation) 8 (Reverse freq.) 9 (Modulation) Action on: Switch to the GPS Enter the digit in Direct Entry. Navigation display. FUNCTION Switch to the GPS Toggle the attenuator Change the + Tap...
Page 898 BCD996XTHoldMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki FUNCTION Enter the Menu for + Tap the current system or search range. Key Name (2nd operation) Action on: SQUELCH VOLUME SCAN/SEARCH HOLD/RESUME Rotate Adjust Squelch. Adjust volume. Turn fully counterclockwise past click to turn off scanner.
Page 899 BCD996XTHoldMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Temporary lockout the Activate the FUNCTION mode for the next keypress. current channel. If the current channel is temporarily or permanently locked out, unlock it. Function + Tap Temporarily lockout the current system. If the current system is temporarily or permanently locked out,...
Page 900 BCD996XTHoldMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki To see the alternate information on the display at the top, cycle through the display modes. To see the display at the bottom of the diagram, tap FUNCTION . For an explanation of System and Channel Number Tags, see Number Tags.
Page 901 BCD996XTHoldMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Service search with scan hold display file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20...s/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCD996XTHoldMode.html (6 of 7)5/26/2009 11:15:35 AM...
Page 902 BCD996XTHoldMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20...s/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCD996XTHoldMode.html (7 of 7)5/26/2009 11:15:35 AM...
Page 903 BCD996XTKeySafeMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key Safe Mode This page applies only to the BCD996XT. For other models see: BCD396XT and BC346XT Key Safe Mode BCT15X Key Safe Mode Key Safe mode locks out the programming menu and more advanced functions so the user can't accidently "break"...
Page 904 BCD996XTKeySafeMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key Name (2nd operation) Weather 4 (IF exchange) 5 (Level offset) 6 (Display mode) Action on: Normal Operation FUNCTION Normal Operation Disabled Normal Operation + Tap while holding FUNCTION Normal Operation Normal Operation + Tap while scanning Press &...
Page 905 BCD996XTKeySafeMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki FUNCTION Disabled Normal Operation Disabled + Tap Key Name (2nd operation) Action on: SQUELCH VOLUME SCAN/SEARCH HOLD/RESUME Rotate Normal Operation Normal Operation In Close Call, Tone- Normal Operation Out, WX, GPS, and Band Scope modes, this key is disabled.
Page 906 BCD996XTKeySafeMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Function + Tap Normal Operation (temporary lockout only) Press & Hold Disabled Normal Operation This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%2...mp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCD996XTKeySafeMode.html (4 of 4)5/26/2009 11:15:38 AM...
Page 907 BCD996XTScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Scan mode This page applies only to the BCD996XT. For other models see: BCD396XT and BC346XT Scan Mode BCT15X Scan Mode Scanning vs. Searching Scanning trunked systems Searching trunked systems Default Scan Mode Locked Items...
Page 908 BCD996XTScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki The scanner monitors the system until the hold time expires, then moves on to the next system. Default Scan Mode In the default Scan mode, the scanner checks frequencies in the following order: 1. Scans or searches any unlocked systems programmed to system Quick Keys (SQKs) in ascending order starting with the system or site assigned to SQK #1.
Page 909 BCD996XTScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki you select here. FUNCTION + tap MENU to edit the current system. Keypad controls Key Name (2nd operation) 1 (Search 1) 2 (Search 2) 3 (Search 3) Action On Toggle priority Disable the systems or sites assigned to this System/Site Quick Key modes.
Page 910 BCD996XTScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki FUNCTION Change to GPS Disable the channel groups in the current system assigned to this Group + Tap Mode. Quick Key (GQK). Tap again to enable. Key Name (2nd MENU operation) . / No Yes (Enter) Action on: Go to the Menu Start a 2-digit SQK...
Page 911 BCD996XTScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Press & Go to Close Call Hold on the current Hold Only mode. system. If already holding on a system, resume normal scanning. FUNCTION Go to Fire Tone- Go to the P25 status When scanning a Hold on the current + Tap Out Mode.
Page 912 BCD996XTScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Press & Hold If stopped on a channel, "Latch" the FUNCTION mode. Scanner stays on the unlock all channels in current system and all keypresses use the FUNCTION the current system. mode until you tap the control again. FUNCTION + Tap Temporarily lockout the current system.
Page 913 BCD996XTScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki FUNCTION Toggle Weather When monitoring a Switch the display + Tap Priority Mode frequency, toggle the IF mode. for that frequency. Press & Go to Weather Hold Scan mode. Key Name (2nd operation) 7 (Attenuation) 8 (Reverse freq.) 9 (Modulation) Action on:...
Page 914 BCD996XTScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key Name (2nd operation) Action on: SQUELCH VOLUME SCAN/SEARCH HOLD/RESUME Rotate Adjust Squelch. Adjust volume. Turn fully counterclockwise past click to turn off scanner. Toggle Close Call Change backlight level. Go to Scan mode. Hold on the current modes.
Page 915 "Latch" the FUNCTION mode. Scanner stays on the unlock all search current system and all keypresses use the FUNCTION frequencies. mode until you tap the control again. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20...s/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCD996XTScanMode.html (9 of 9)5/26/2009 11:15:46 AM...
Page 916 BCD996XTSettings < UnidenMan4 < TWiki BCD996XT Settings This page applies only to the BCD996XT. For other models see: BCD396XT and BC346XT Settings BCT15X Settings Set Backlight Set Dimmer Auto: Select Polarity Manual Set Color Adjust Key Beep Adjust Audio AGC...
Page 917 BCD996XTSettings < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Set Dimmer Selects whether the backlight brightness is set automatically or manually. Auto: Select Polarity The backlight dims when +12V is applied to the orange lead. Polarity - Polarity The backlight dims when +12V is not being applied to the orange lead.
Page 918 BCD996XTSettings < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Response Time How frequently the -4 to +6 (default=0) -8 to +8 AGC factor updates. (default=0) Decrease this value to make AGC respond faster (but this could result in pumping). Increase this value to make AGC respond more slowly.
Page 919 BCD996XTSettings < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Extend : The scanner will output the control channel data along with any description. Set GPS Format Configure how the scanner displays position coordinates, time, and units during GPS operation: Set Pos Format Select how the scanner displays longitude and latitude: DMS: DDD°...
Page 920 BCD996XTSettings < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Band Defaults Use this menu to change the default modulation and frequency step or spacing used for each band. The scanner displays the list of available bands in the following format: {Frequency} : {modulation type} / {step} Select the frequency band you want to edit.
Page 921 See the firmware version ( Version), the electronic serial number ( ESN), checksum ( SUM), and major firmware version number ( M-Ver) of the scanner. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...ts/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCD996XTSettings.html (6 of 6)5/26/2009 11:15:47 AM...
Page 922: Calculating Upper Base Frequencies
CalculatingUpperBaseFrequencies < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Calculating upper base frequencies Custom Band Plans (800 Custom, VHF, UHF) require that you enter both a lower and an upper base frequency value. Here's how to determine these values. The Lower Base Frequency (or Base ) is always the base frequency as provided in the RRDB.
Page 923 CalculatingUpperBaseFrequencies < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Entry Base Spacing Offset 155.4150 15.0 157.2000 12.5 157.4700 15.0 Plugging these values into our formula, we get: For entry A: Upper Base ( Offset – – × Step Base Offset Upper 155.415 MHz (436 – 1 –...
Page 924 4.575 MHz Base Upper 162.045 MHz Base Click here to download a spreadsheet that will do all the math for you.) This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Do...e_090515/Manual/CalculatingUpperBaseFrequencies.html (3 of 3)5/26/2009 11:15:48 AM...
Page 925 CloseCall < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Close Call To determine whether the information on this page applies to your scanner, see the tags at the bottom of the page. The Close Call (CC) feature searches for signals that are stronger than other signals on the band (indicating the transmitter is probably somewhere close by).
Page 926 CloseCall < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Srch/CloCall Opt menu. Hits with Scan The scanner stores the 10 most recent close call hits to a temporary system; you can set the options for this temporary system, just like you can for permanent systems. The scanner deletes the 10 saved frequencies in this temporary system when you turn the power off.
Page 927 CloseCall < UnidenMan4 < TWiki site even if there is no traffic on any channel. (The scanner always checks each channel in a system or site once even if the hold time is set to 0 seconds.) Select the number of seconds from 0 through 255 (0 is the default).
Page 928 Select each band you want to search, then press YES to turn that band On . The scanner only searches for close call hits on bands that are turned on. Band BCD396XT and BC346XT BCT15X BCD996XT frequencies frequencies frequencies VHF Low 25.0000–53.9800 25.0000–53.9800...
Page 929 CloseCall < UnidenMan4 < TWiki 800 MHz 758.0000–823.9875 806.0000–823.9875 758.0000-823.9875 849.0125–868.9875 849.0125–868.9875 849.0125-868.9875 894.0125–960.0000 894.0125–960.0000 894.0125-960.0000 1240.0000– 1240.0000– 1240.0000- 1300.0000 MHz 1300.0000 MHz 1300.0000 MHz This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/CloseCall.html (5 of 5)5/26/2009 11:15:49 AM...
Page 930: Fips Codes
IntroductionToSAMEMessages < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Introduction to SAME messages Hazard alerts are transmitted with Specific Area Message Encoding (SAME) data, which includes: Nature of the alert Hazard level Affected counties Expiration time Receivers that can decode the SAME data can filter alerts by area and/or hazard level and show details about the alert on a display.
Page 931 For a complete index of the FIPS codes used in SAME broadcasts, see the United States and Territories Table at the National Weather Radio website, or call 1-888-NWR- SAME (1-888-697-7263) for a voice menu. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...Image_090515/Manual/IntroductionToSAMEMessages.html (2 of 2)5/26/2009 11:15:50 AM...
Page 932 When the transfer is finished, both scanners display a Complete message. Reboot the slave scanner to load the new settings. All settings and data saved on the Slave scanner will be erased! This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/MobileWiredClone.html5/26/2009 11:15:51 AM...
Page 933: Motorola Fleet Maps
MotorolaFleetMaps < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Motorola fleet maps Preset Fleet Maps Custom Fleet Maps How Fleet Maps Work Blocks Size Codes Preset Fleet Maps The scanner contains 16 pre-programmed fleet maps you can select. The table below gives the size code for each block of the preset fleet maps: Block number Preset 1...
Page 934 MotorolaFleetMaps < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Preset 12 Preset 13 Preset 14 Preset 15 Preset 16 Custom Fleet Maps To program a custom fleet map, select Custom under the Edit Fleet Map option. Then, select the appropriate size code for each block. Remember, not all size codes are available for all blocks: Block Valid Size Codes...
Page 935 MotorolaFleetMaps < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Block 0 - 11 (12, 13, 14 not valid) How Fleet Maps Work Blocks Talk Group IDs can range from 0 to 65,535. To make it easier to handle this many IDs, the system divides the TGID range into 8 equal blocks : Starting Ending Block...
Page 936 4 / 8 / 256 2 / 16 / 256 1 / 16 / 1024 1 / 16 / 2048 1 / 16 / 4096 This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Do...ts/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/MotorolaFleetMaps.html (4 of 4)5/26/2009 11:15:52 AM...
Page 937 PriorityScan < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Priority Scan To determine whether the information on this page applies to your scanner, see the tags at the bottom of the page. This section applies to conventional system priority mode only. For priority on trunked systems, turn on the Priority ID system option and set the desired channels as priority channels.
Page 938 20 and there are 100 priority channels, the scanner checks those 100 channels in groups of 20 and takes a total of 5 intervals to complete the priority scan. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/PriorityScan.html (2 of 2)5/26/2009 11:15:53 AM...
Page 939 ProgramLocation < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Program Location The Program Location menu lets you create and edit points of interest ( POI ), intersections( Dangerous Xing ), and roads ( Dangerous Road ). The available settings vary for each location type. Edit Name Set Type Set Alert...
Page 940 ProgramLocation < UnidenMan4 < TWiki VOLUME-SQUELCH knob on the handheld scanners or the SCROLL / FUNCTION knob on mobile scanners to choose the character you want, then press 6 (right cursor) to move the cursor to the next character. Set Type When you create a location, the location is created as the type you are currently viewing (POI, Dangerous Xing, or Dangerous Road).
Page 941 ProgramLocation < UnidenMan4 < TWiki for 100 ms / 1397 Hz for 250 ms Alert 3 : 2093 Hz for 125 ms / Silence for 50 ms / 1976 Hz for 125 ms / Silence for 50 ms / 2093 Hz for 125 ms Alert 4 : 1319 Hz for 25 ms / Silence for 50 ms / 1397 Hz for 25 ms / Silence for 50 ms / 1175 Hz for 25 ms / Silence for 50 ms / 1319 Hz for 25 ms...
Page 942: Set Alert Volume
ProgramLocation < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Delete Location Delete this location and its settings, including any alert settings. New Location Create a new location. Dangerous Xing and Dangerous Road menus (The settings and available options for dangerous crossings and dangerous roads are exactly the same.) Edit Name Enter a name or edit the existing one.
Page 943: Set Speed Limit
ProgramLocation < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Dangerous Xing alert tone: 1175 Hz for 250 ms / Silence for 50 ms / 1319 Hz for 50 ms / Silence for 50 ms / 1397 Hz for 250 ms Dangerous Road alert tone 1568 Hz for 250 ms / Silence for 50 ms / 1760 Hz for 50 ms / Silence for 50 ms / 1976 Hz for 250 ms / Silence for 50 ms / 2093 Hz for 50 ms / Silence for 50 ms / 1047 Hz for 250 ms...
Page 944 Lockout (the location is locked out until you change this setting). Delete Location Delete this location and its settings, including any alert settings. New Location Create a new location. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Do...ents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/ProgramLocation.html (6 of 6)5/26/2009 11:15:53 AM...
Page 945 If the system you selected is an EDACS SCAT system , the scanner displays an error message: the search and store feature can't be used on EDACS SCAT systems. Back to Search menu This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/SearchAndStore.html5/26/2009 11:15:59 AM...
Page 946 3 search keys. Service Search Edit Service Set Delay Time Set Attenuator Set Audio AGC (BCD996XT and BCD396XT Only) Set Record (BCD996XT and BCT15X Only) P25 Waiting Time (BCD996XT and BCD396XT Only) Search with Scan Custom Search...
Page 947 Turn on attenuation to reduce the signal strength by 20 dB. All frequencies in the search range are attenuated during search. Set Audio AGC (BCD996XT and BCD396XT Only) Turn on Automatic Gain Control (AGC) for this system. When you activate this feature, the scanner automatically adjusts the volume for each channel based on the signal strength.
Page 948 SearchFor < UnidenMan4 < TWiki P25 Waiting Time (BCD996XT and BCD396XT Only) When searching in a band that has a mix of analog and digital signals (i.e., where the Audio Mode is set to All), it is possible to have false decode problems that results in digital noise at the beginning of transmissions.
Page 949 SearchFor < UnidenMan4 < TWiki move the cursor to the next character. Edit Srch Limit Change the range of frequencies covered by this custom search. The scanner prompts you to input the lower frequency limit and then the upper frequency limit. Set Delay Time Set the number of seconds the scanner should wait after a transmission stops before moving on to the next channel.
Page 950 Edit Band Plan for more information. Set Audio AGC (BCD996XT and BCD396XT Only) Turn on Automatic Gain Control (AGC) for this system. When you activate this feature, the scanner automatically adjusts the volume for each channel based on the signal strength.
Page 951 3. Press YES to confirm the selection. Once you assign a search range to a key, you can start the search just by pressing the appropriate key. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCD396XT BCT15X Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/SearchFor.html (6 of 6)5/26/2009 11:16:00 AM...
Page 952 SearchWithScan < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Search with Scan To determine whether the information on this page applies to your scanner, see the tags at the bottom of the page. Set Quick Key Set Startup Key Set Number Tag Set Lockout Set Hold Time Set Quick Key Assign this search range to a Quick Key so you can easily enable or disable it during...
Page 953 Set how long the scanner spends checking this search range before moving to the next search range or system. (2 seconds is the default). This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...ents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/SearchWithScan.html (2 of 2)5/26/2009 11:16:01 AM...
Page 954 Level 15 ) you want to the alert tone to use; leave the volume at Auto to have the scanner sound the alert tone without changing the volume. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/SetAlertTone.html5/26/2009 11:16:01 AM...
Page 955 Repeater Find Max Auto Store Set Delay Time Set Attenuator Set Audio AGC (BCD996XT and BCD396XT only) Set Record (BCD996XT and BCT15X only) P25 Waiting Time (BCD396XT and BCD996XT only) Freq Lockouts Rvw Search L/O : This option displays a list of all locked out frequencies. To unlock any frequency on the list, just select it and press YES .
Page 956 4. Once you create the custom band, turn screening on or off the same way you did for the preset bands. Tone/Code Search (BCD396XT and BCD996XT) Choose whether the scanner searches an active frequency for CTCSS/DCS tones file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...ents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/SrchCloCallOpt.html (2 of 4)5/26/2009 11:16:02 AM...
Page 957 SrchCloCallOpt < UnidenMan4 < TWiki ( CTCSS/DCS Search), P25 NAC codes ( P25 NAC Search), or neither ( Off). (The scanner ignores this setting in AM, WFM, and FMB bands.) CTCSS / DCS Search (BC346XT and BCT15X) Choose whether the scanner searches an active frequency for CTCSS/DCS tones ( On)or not ( Off).
Page 958 Quick Search mode, Close Call mode, and the Band Scope will be attenuated. Set Audio AGC (BCD996XT and BCD396XT only) Turn on Automatic Gain Control (AGC) for this system. When you activate this feature, the scanner automatically adjusts the volume for each channel based on the signal strength.
Page 959 StartupKeys < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Startup Keys Startup Keys let you change the lockout state for several systems, sites, and search ranges all at the same time. When you activate the Startup Key, the scanner checks all systems, sites, or search ranges and locks or unlocks them according to these rules: If any systems, sites, or search ranges do not have a Startup Key assigned, the scanner does not change their locked/unlocked state (i.e., if they are unlocked, it leaves them unlocked).
Page 960 StartupKeys < UnidenMan4 < TWiki To a service search range : 1. Open the Search for... menu. 2. Select Edit Service, then select the service search range you want to assign the Startup Key to. 3. Select Search with Scan, then select Set Startup Key.
Page 961 Assigned Startup Previous Resulting state state Locked Locked None (.) Unlocked Unlocked (no change) None (.) Locked Locked (no change) Unlocked Locked This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/StartupKeys.html (3 of 3)5/26/2009 11:16:03 AM...
Page 962: Tone A And Tone B Settings
ToneAAndToneBSettings < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Tone A and Tone B Settings You can configure the scanner to search for tones in several different ways, based on the values you enter for Tone A and Tone B: Tone A Positive number Tone B Setting Positive number setting Operation Monitor the channel for two-tone pages only.
Page 963 4. If the detected tone does not match any saved tones, the scanner opens squelch, flashes the tone information on the display, and asks if you want to save the tone information. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20...p/CDImage_090515/Manual/ToneAAndToneBSettings.html (2 of 2)5/26/2009 11:16:04 AM...
Page 964 Set Delay Time Set Alert Set Alert Tone Set Alert Light Set Audio AGC (BCD396XT and BCD996XT Only) Set Record (BCD996XT and BCT15X Only) Tone-Out Search Tone-Out Standby Check the tone out channels for paging tones, according to each channel's individual settings.
Page 965 Set Alert Tone Set Alert Light Set Audio AGC (BCD396XT and BCD996XT Only) Turn on Automatic Gain Control (AGC) for this Tone-Out channel. When you activate this feature, the scanner automatically adjusts the volume for the channel based on the signal strength.
Page 966 ToneOutFor < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Set Record (BCD996XT and BCT15X Only) Turn this setting on to have the audio from received tone-outs included on the rear RECORD OUT jack. Tone-Out Search You can set the scanner to search for and identify the tones used in tone-outs. To do so, you set both the A and B tones to a value of "0".
Page 967 Edit County Set Delay Time Set Attenuator Set Audio AGC Set Record (BCD996XT Only) WX Alt Priority Weather Scan Start a normal weather scan. In normal weather scan mode, the scanner does not react to alert tones on weather channels.
Page 968 WXOperation < UnidenMan4 < TWiki opens squelch on the weather channel. SAME 1 through SAME 5 Choose one of 5 programmable regions to filter alerts by. The scanner only responds to alerts that affect the selected region you select here, and only if the hazard level is an Advisory, a Watch, or a Warning.
Page 969 You can turn on the gain control for Analog and Digital signals separately. To change the settings for the audio AGC, see Adjust Audio AGC Set Record (BCD996XT Only) Turn on this option if you want the weather mode audio to be included on the rear RECORD OUT jack.
Page 970 Scan, Search, or Close Call mode. The scanner can't run Weather Alert Priority check in Search and Store, Close Call Auto Store, Tone-Out or Band Scope modes. This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCD396XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/WXOperation.html (4 of 4)5/26/2009 11:16:06 AM...
Page 971 Close Call Auto Store), in Tone Out mode, or in Band Scope mode. Weather menus BCD396XT and BCD996XT WX Operation menu BC346XT and BCT15X WX Operation menu This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD996XT BCT15X BCD396XT BCD346XT Users Guide...
Page 972 AnalogEditChannel < UnidenMan4 < TWiki To determine whether the information on this page applies to your scanner, see the tags at the bottom of the page. This menu lets you create channels and edit existing channels. All existing channels are listed in the order they were created: select the channel you want to edit, or select New Channel to create a new one.
Page 973 AnalogEditChannel < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Edit Talk Group ID menu Global channel options You have the following options when editing channels in any system: Edit Name Enter a name or edit the existing one. Names can be 16 characters long, and they can contain upper and lower case letters, punctuation, and spaces.
Page 974 AnalogEditChannel < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Channel System Option to fully enable this function. Set Lockout Decide whether you want to lock out a system, site, or channel so the scanner will ignore it during Scan and Search modes. If you lock out a system or site, all channels within that system or site will be locked out.
Page 975 AnalogEditChannel < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Create a new channel. Conventional system channel options You have the following additional options when editing channels in a conventional system: Set CTCSS/DCS (Conventional systems only) Choose one of the following CTCSS/DCS options for this channel: The scanner ignores all CTCSS and DCS tones and opens squelch on any signal.
Page 976 AnalogEditChannel < UnidenMan4 < TWiki The scanner treats the frequency as an FM broadcast band. Set Attenuator Turn on attenuation to reduce the signal strength by 20 dB. You can turn on attentuation for individual frequencies and channels or for entire sites. If you turn on attenuation for a site, all frequencies within that site will be attenuated.
Page 977 AnalogWXOperation < UnidenMan4 < TWiki WX Operation To determine whether the information on this page applies to your scanner, see the tags at the bottom of the page. This menu lets you configure how the scanner operates in Weather (WX) mode and Weather Alert (WX Alert) mode.
Page 978 AnalogWXOperation < UnidenMan4 < TWiki SAME 1 through SAME 5 Choose one of 5 programmable regions to filter alerts by. The scanner only responds to alerts that affect the selected region you select here, and only if the hazard level is an Advisory, a Watch, or a Warning.
Page 979 AnalogWXOperation < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Set the number of seconds the scanner should wait after a transmission stops before moving on to the next channel. Select 0, 1, 2 (default), 5, 10, or 30 seconds. To have scanner leave the channel after a designated number of seconds whether the transmission stops or not, select one of the negative values.
Page 980 This page applies only to the BCT15X. For other models see: BCD396XT and BC346XT Hold Mode BCD996XT Hold Mode Hold mode lets you edit the current frequency, system, site, or channel. You can access these functions by using the different key operations:...
Page 981 BCT15XHoldMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki FUNCTION + Toggle the Weather Toggle the attenuator state. Change the modulation. Priority mode. FUNCTION + Go to Weather Scan Toggle the attenuator state for all If on a channel that has a Press & hold mode.
Page 982 BCT15XHoldMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key Name (2nd operation) LOCKOUT Action on: SCROLL - FUNCTION Rotate Scroll through channels. Function + Rotate Scroll through systems. Temporary lockout the current Activate the FUNCTION mode for the next keypress. channel. If the current channel is temporarily or permanently locked out, unlock it.
Page 983 BCT15XHoldMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Display Modes 1 and 3 Display Mode 2 To see the alternate information on the display at the top, cycle through the display modes by pressing FUNCTION + 6/DISP. To see the display at the bottom of the diagram, tap FUNCTION . For an explanation of System and Channel Number Tags, see Number Tags.
Page 984 BCT15XHoldMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Display Mode 1 Display Mode 2 Display Mode 3 Hold on a trunked system control channel If you press HOLD while the scanner is scanning an idle trunked system, the scanner will hold on the active control channel. file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20...nts/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCT15XHoldMode.html (5 of 6)5/26/2009 11:16:17 AM...
Page 985 BCT15XHoldMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki For Motorola systems, the Site name will alternate with the System/Site ID. As channels become active, their TGID or Channel Alsph Tag will appear. Service search with scan hold display This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCT15X Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20...nts/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCT15XHoldMode.html (6 of 6)5/26/2009 11:16:17 AM...
Page 986 This page applies only to the BCT15X. For other models see: BCD396XT and BC346XT Key Safe Mode BCD996XT Key Safe Mode Key Safe mode locks out the programming menu and more advanced functions so the user can't accidently "break" the scanner. This mode is ideal for any situation where you want another person to be able to use the scanner without changing any of the settings.
Page 987 BCT15XKeySafeMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key Name (2nd operation) Beartracker / 4 (IF exchange) 5 (Level offset) 6 (Display mode) Highway Patrol / Action on: Alert Normal Operation FUNCTION Scan mode: Disabled Normal Operation + Tap while Normal Operation holding Other modes: Disabled FUNCTION...
Page 988 BCT15XKeySafeMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki FUNCTION Disabled Normal Operation + Tap Key Name (2nd operation) Action on: SQUELCH VOLUME SCAN/SEARCH HOLD/RESUME Rotate Normal Operation Normal Operation In Close Call, Tone- Normal Operation Out, WX, GPS, and Band Scope modes, this key is disabled. In Search mode, this operates as the Resume function.
Page 989 BCT15XKeySafeMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Normal Operation (temporary lockout Normal Operation only) Function + Tap Normal Operation (temporary lockout only) Press & Hold Disabled Normal Operation This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCT15X Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20.../temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCT15XKeySafeMode.html (4 of 4)5/26/2009 11:16:19 AM...
Page 990 BCT15XScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Scan mode This page applies only to the BCT15X. For other models see: BCD396XT and BC346XT Scan Mode BCD996XT Scan Mode Scanning vs. Searching Scanning trunked systems Searching trunked systems State-by-State and Beartracker Warning System...
Page 991 BCT15XScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki ends or until the Delay Time expires. The scanner monitors the system until the hold time expires, then moves on to the next system. State-by-State and Beartracker Warning System If any of the state-by-state searches are enabled, normal reception will be interrupted periodically (as set by the Set Interval setting in the Priority Scan menu) to search for signals in the enabled searches.
Page 992 BCT15XScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki the group containing it is locked Set Lockout field is set to Locked Out or Temporary L/O Key operation in Scan mode Special keys Turn the SCROLL knob to change the direction of the scan. While monitoring a channel, rotate the SCROLL knob or press SCAN to resume scanning.
Page 993 BCT15XScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key Name (2nd operation) GPS / Weather 7 (Attenuation) 8 (Reverse freq.) 9 (Modulation) Action on: Change to GPS Disable the systems or sites assigned to this System/Site Quick Key Mode. (SQK). Tap again to enable. FUNCTION Toggle Weather Disable the channel groups in the current system assigned to this Group...
Page 994 BCT15XScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Rotate Adjust Squelch. Adjust volume. Turn fully counterclockwise past click to turn off scanner. Temporarily stop Change backlight level. Resume scanning (if Hold on the current alert tone. Tap stopped on a channel). channel. again to restore. Press &...
Page 995 BCT15XScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Rotate Change scan direction. If stopped on a channel, resume scanning. If stopped on a channel, Activate the FUNCTION mode for the next keypress. temporarily lockout the channel. Double Tap If stopped on a channel, permanently lockout the channel.
Page 996 BCT15XScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key Name (2nd operation) Highway Patrol / 4 (IF exchange) 5 (Level offset) 6 (Display mode) Alert Action on: Go to scan mode. Disable the custom search range assigned to this key. Tap again to enable. FUNCTION Go to Alert Plus When monitoring a...
Page 997 BCT15XScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki FUNCTION Enter the "Search If stopped on a + Tap for..." Menu. frequency, store the current frequency. Key Name (2nd operation) Action on: SQUELCH VOLUME SCAN/SEARCH HOLD/RESUME Rotate Adjust Squelch. Adjust volume. Turn fully counterclockwise past click to turn off scanner.
Page 998 BCT15XScanMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Rotate Change search direction. If stopped on a frequency, resume searching. If stopped on a frequency, Activate the FUNCTION mode for the next keypress. temporarily lockout the frequency. Double Tap If stopped on a frequency, permanently lockout the frequency.
Page 999 BCT15XSettings < UnidenMan4 < TWiki BCT15X Settings This page applies only to the BCT15X. For other models see: BCD996XT Settings BCD396XT and BC346XT Settings Set Backlight Set Dimmer Auto: Select Polarity Manual Adjust Key Beep Set Upside-down Adjust Contrast Set C-CH Output...
Page 1000 BCT15XSettings < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Selects whether the backlight brightness is set automatically or manually. Auto: Select Polarity The backlight dims when +12V is applied to the orange lead. Polarity - Polarity The backlight dims when +12V is not being applied to the orange lead.
Page 1001 BCT15XSettings < UnidenMan4 < TWiki description. Set GPS Format Configure how the scanner displays position coordinates, time, and units during GPS operation: Set Pos Format Select how the scanner displays longitude and latitude: DMS: DDD° MM' SS.ss : Display coordinates in degrees (DDD), minutes (MM), and seconds (SS.ss).
Page 1002 BCT15XSettings < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Band Defaults Use this menu to change the default modulation and frequency step or spacing used for each band. The scanner displays the list of available bands in the following format: {Frequency} : {modulation type} / {step} Select the frequency band you want to edit.
Page 1003 BCT15XSettings < UnidenMan4 < TWiki This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCT15X Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20D...ents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/BCT15XSettings.html (5 of 5)5/26/2009 11:16:23 AM...
Page 1004 SetBearTracker < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Set Bear Tracker To determine whether the information on this page applies to your scanner, see the tags at the bottom of the page. The menu items under Set Bear Tracker affect how the Beartracker Warning System operates.
Page 1005: Set Record
SetBearTracker < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Set Alert This sets the alert tone and light for BearTracker Warning System alerts. Set Alert Tone First, select the alert pattern to sound. As you scroll through options, the scanner sounds the selected tone. Press E to make your selection. The scanner then prompts you to select the tone level.
Page 1006 This page applies only to the BCD396XT and BC346XT. For other models see: BCD996XT Hold Mode BCT15X Hold Mode Hold stops the scanner on the current channel or frequency. You can access these functions by using the different key operations:...
Page 1007 HoldMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Key Name (2nd operation) Action on: Scan (Search) 6 (Display 5 (Volume 4 (IF exchange) mode) offset) Enter Scan Enter the number on the key mode. FUNCTION Enter Search Switch to an Change the Rotate through + Tap mode.
Page 1008 HoldMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki FUNCTION Unlock the Toggle the Change the + Tap current System, attenuator state modulation type. Site, or Search if for the current locked. signal. If unloced, single-tap to temporarily lock or double-tap to permanently lock the current system, site, or search.
Page 1009 HoldMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Press & hold Turn the scanner on or off. FUNCTION Lock or unlock Turn Priority Change the Enter GPS mode. + Tap the keypad. scan on or off. weather alert priority setting. FUNCTION Turn the scanner Enter Weather + Press &...
Page 1010 HoldMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki To see the alternate information on the display at the top, cycle through the display modes. To see the display at the bottom of the diagram, tap FUNCTION . For an explanation of System and Channel Number Tags, see Number Tags.
Page 1011 HoldMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Service search with scan hold display file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/HoldMode.html (6 of 7)5/26/2009 11:16:31 AM...
Page 1012 HoldMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki This page applies to the following scanner(s): BCD396XT BC346XT Users Guide file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/POpitz/My%20Documents/temp/CDImage_090515/Manual/HoldMode.html (7 of 7)5/26/2009 11:16:31 AM...
Page 1013 BCD396XT and BC346XT. For other models see: BCD996XT Key Safe Mode BCT15X Key Safe Mode Key Safe mode locks out the programming menu and more advanced functions so the user can't accidently "break" the scanner. This mode is ideal for any situation where you want another person to be able to use the scanner without changing any of the settings.
Page 1014 KeySafeMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki FUNCTION Normal While Scanning: Normal Operation + Tap operation While Holding: Disabled FUNCTION Disabled + Press & hold Key Name (2nd operation) Action on: Scan (Search) 6 (Display 5 (Volume 4 (IF exchange) mode) offset) In Close Call, Normal operation.
Page 1015 KeySafeMode < UnidenMan4 < TWiki Normal Normal Operation. operation (Temporary Lockout Only). Double tap Normal Operation. Press & hold Disabled Normal operation. FUNCTION Normal While scanning: Normal operation + Tap Operation (Temporary While Holding: Disabled Lockout Only). FUNCTION While scanning: Disabled While scanning: + Double...

This manual is also suitable for:

Bct15x Bc346xt Bcd396xt

Uniden BCD996XT User Manual

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Quick Links

Chapters

Related Manuals for Uniden BCD996XT

Summary of Contents for Uniden BCD996XT